- All categories
Welcome to Wikbeauty
Main menu
-
SHOP All
-
Shop by Category
- Shop by Category
-
Body Contouring & Fat Reduction
-
Facial & Skin Rejuvenation
-
Recovery & Circulation Therapy
-
Bestsellers
Your cart
Product Comparison
Describe you product comparison grid
|
__ __ |
|
|---|---|
| Vendor |
Vendor - __ |
| SKU |
SKU - __ |
| Description |
Description - __ |
| Customizable title |
Customizable title - __ |
| Variant name |
Variant name - __ |
|
|
Compare products ( / )
Products
Products
Transform Every Treatment
From fat reduction to facial rejuvenation, our professional-grade equipment is built to elevate every service on your menu, giving clients real results and your business a competitive edge.
78 products
78 products
Sort by:
- Featured
- Most relevant
- Best selling
- Alphabetically, A-Z
- Alphabetically, Z-A
- Price, low to high
- Price, high to low
- Date, old to new
- Date, new to old
From $2,699.00
Professional EMS Muscle-Toning and Body-Contouring System
Non-Invasive Electrical Muscle Stimulation for Targeted Body Sculpting
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to support muscle conditioning, body toning, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology delivers controlled electrical impulses to targeted muscles, producing repeated involuntary contractions. These contractions help activate muscle fibers and support structured muscle-toning programs without conventional weight training during treatment.
With multiple treatment applicators, adjustable intensity levels, a clear LCD interface, and portable construction, the system can be used for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves.
EMS muscle stimulation | Multiple applicators | Adjustable intensity | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Electrical Muscle Stimulation
EMS technology sends controlled electrical impulses through the treatment applicators and into targeted muscles. These impulses generate repeated involuntary contractions throughout the selected program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock toning
-
Thigh muscle stimulation
-
Upper-arm definition
-
Calf muscle conditioning
-
General body-toning programs
Targeted Body Contouring
Applicators can be positioned over specific muscle groups, enabling practitioners to create personalized treatments according to the client’s body-contouring objectives.
Common applications include:
-
Waistline definition
-
Abdominal contouring
-
Buttock shaping
-
Inner- and outer-thigh toning
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Lower-leg definition
Adjustable Muscle-Conditioning Programs
Intensity can be adjusted from Level 1 to Level 10 according to the selected area and client comfort. This enables practitioners to begin at a lower setting and increase the stimulation progressively.
Common benefits include:
-
Personalized treatment intensity
-
Progressive muscle activation
-
Different settings for different body areas
-
Improved client comfort
-
Structured multi-session programs
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Muscle-Conditioning Program
Designed to focus on repeated muscle activation and improved muscle tone in a selected area.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock toning
-
Arm muscle stimulation
-
Thigh and calf conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved muscle definition
-
Clients supplementing regular fitness activities
-
Clients interested in assisted muscle stimulation
Body-Contouring Program
Focuses on improving the appearance and definition of selected body areas through targeted EMS treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Waistline contouring
-
Buttock shaping
-
Inner-thigh toning
-
Outer-thigh contouring
-
Upper-arm definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about reduced muscle tone
-
Clients seeking a firmer-looking silhouette
-
Clients following an active and balanced lifestyle
Multi-Area Sculpting Program
Allows practitioners to create a structured plan covering several body areas over a series of sessions.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and buttocks
-
Abdomen and thighs
-
Arms and abdomen
-
Thighs and calves
-
Complete body-toning packages
Recommended for:
-
Clients with several treatment objectives
-
Clients seeking comprehensive body conditioning
-
Professional clinics offering treatment packages
Maintenance Program
Designed to help clients continue their muscle-conditioning routine after completing an initial treatment course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-tone maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Seasonal body-shaping programs
-
Continued fitness and wellness support
Recommended for:
-
Returning EMS clients
-
Clients who have completed six to eight sessions
-
Clients combining treatment with regular exercise
Adjustable Intensity and Treatment Settings
The EMS Sculpting Machine allows treatment intensity to be customized according to the body area, selected protocol, and client comfort.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Intensity Levels | 1–10 | Progressive, comfort-based muscle stimulation |
| Stimulation Frequency | Adjustable | Customizable treatment protocols |
| Treatment Applicators | Multiple | Treatments for different muscle groups |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30 minutes | Efficient professional or personal use |
| Recommended Course | Six to eight sessions | Structured muscle-conditioning program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive treatment planning |
| Control System | LCD interface | Simple setting and program management |
Treatment settings should always be selected according to user suitability, individual tolerance, and the supplied operating instructions.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waist
The applicators can be positioned over the abdominal muscles to support muscle conditioning and midsection definition.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle stimulation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved abdominal tone
Buttocks and Thighs
Treatments can be customized for the buttocks, inner thighs, outer thighs, and other suitable areas of the legs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock toning and shaping
-
Inner-thigh muscle conditioning
-
Outer-thigh contouring
-
Lower-body definition
Arms and Calves
The system can also support targeted muscle stimulation for smaller treatment areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Biceps stimulation
-
Triceps conditioning
-
Upper-arm definition
-
Calf muscle toning
Professional Body-Sculpting Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Suitable Program |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Muscle-conditioning program |
| Waist | Improve the appearance of body contours | Body-contouring program |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape enhancement | Muscle or multi-area program |
| Inner Thighs | Muscle conditioning and leg definition | Body-contouring program |
| Outer Thighs | Hip and thigh contouring | Multi-area program |
| Upper Arms | Biceps and triceps stimulation | Muscle-conditioning program |
| Calves | Lower-leg muscle conditioning | Muscle-conditioning program |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment goals, target areas, and possible contraindications. Explain the expected muscle-contraction sensation and establish realistic treatment objectives.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Choose the appropriate applicators and position them securely over the selected muscle groups. Ensure correct skin contact and avoid prohibited treatment areas.
Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select the appropriate stimulation frequency, intensity, and session duration. Begin at a low intensity and increase it progressively according to the client’s comfort and muscle response.
Step 4: EMS Treatment
The system delivers controlled electrical impulses for approximately 30 minutes. The client experiences repeated muscle contractions within the selected treatment area.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
The system completes the selected program, and the applicators are removed. Inspect the treatment area and provide any appropriate post-treatment recommendations.
Designed for Professional and Personal Treatment Environments
The EMS Sculpting Machine combines customizable body-toning functions with straightforward operation and portable construction.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology
-
Multiple body-treatment applicators
-
Adjustable stimulation frequency
-
Ten adjustable intensity levels
-
Treatments for five or more body areas
-
Clear LCD control interface
-
Automatic shut-off
-
Skin-contact sensors
-
Overload protection
-
Lightweight, portable construction
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year parts warranty
-
Customer training and technical support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine |
| Technology | Electrical Muscle Stimulation |
| Stimulation Frequency | Adjustable |
| Intensity Levels | Levels 1–10 |
| Treatment Applicators | Multiple applicators for different body areas |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Six to eight sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly two sessions per week |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves |
| Display | Clear LCD control interface |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, skin-contact sensors, and overload protection |
| Power Input | AC 110V or 220V |
| Design | Lightweight and portable |
| Suitable Environments | Salons, wellness centers, fitness facilities, and home use |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Customer training and technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine
-
Multiple EMS treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Adjustable intensity controls
-
Integrated LCD control interface
-
Standard machine accessories
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
The final number and configuration of treatment applicators should follow the selected product package.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety instructions
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Muscle-conditioning protocols
-
Body-contouring protocol guidance
-
Client consultation materials
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMS Sculpting Machine includes operating guidance to help professionals and approved users operate the system correctly.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
LCD interface operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area selection
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Stimulation-frequency adjustment
-
Intensity-level selection
-
Muscle-conditioning protocols
-
Safety procedures and contraindications
-
Applicator cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for your equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Consumable accessories and components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A client consultation and health-history review should be completed before professional treatment. The machine must be operated according to the supplied instructions.
Treatment may not be suitable for users with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery in the selected area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Neurological conditions affecting sensation
-
Severe skin sensitivity
-
Medical conditions affected by electrical stimulation
Do not position applicators over the heart, head, front or side of the neck, spine, broken skin, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Users with medical concerns should consult an appropriate healthcare professional before beginning treatment.
Operating Precautions
-
Begin every new treatment at a low intensity.
-
Increase the intensity gradually according to comfort.
-
Ensure correct applicator contact before activation.
-
Do not place applicators over prohibited body areas.
-
Inspect applicators and cables before every session.
-
Clean the applicators between professional clients.
-
Keep the machine in a clean, dry environment.
-
Stop treatment if unusual pain or discomfort occurs.
-
Follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Beauty salons
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Wellness centers
-
Fitness and recovery facilities
-
Professional spas
-
Home-based beauty businesses
-
Aesthetic treatment facilities
The machine may also be suitable for personal use when operated according to the supplied manual. Professional services must comply with applicable local licensing, insurance, and operating requirements.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine?
Targeted Muscle Stimulation
EMS technology delivers controlled electrical impulses to selected muscle groups, supporting structured muscle-conditioning and toning programs.
Adjustable Intensity Levels
Ten intensity levels allow users to begin comfortably and increase muscle stimulation progressively according to individual tolerance.
Multiple Treatment Areas
One system can support treatments for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves using suitable applicator placement.
Portable and Easy to Operate
The lightweight design, clear LCD interface, and straightforward controls make the system suitable for professional facilities and approved personal use.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating guidance, training, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the EMS Sculpting Machine?
It is an Electrical Muscle Stimulation system that delivers controlled electrical impulses to targeted muscles for body-toning and muscle-conditioning programs.
How long does one session take?
A standard treatment session takes approximately 30 minutes, depending on the selected body area and treatment protocol.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, buttocks, inner and outer thighs, biceps, triceps, and calves.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends six to eight sessions, commonly scheduled twice per week. The final course should be personalized according to individual suitability and objectives.
What does EMS treatment feel like?
Users typically experience repeated muscle contractions, tingling, or pulsing sensations. The intensity can be adjusted from Level 1 to Level 10 according to comfort.
Does the machine have adjustable intensity?
Yes. The system provides ten adjustable intensity levels and customizable stimulation-frequency settings.
Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system uses external applicators and does not require injections, incisions, or surgery.
Can EMS replace regular exercise?
EMS treatments should complement rather than replace regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
Can the machine directly remove fat?
The primary function of the system is electrical muscle stimulation. Improved muscle tone may support a more defined appearance, but individual body-composition changes vary and should not be guaranteed.
Can it be used at home?
The supplied information indicates suitability for home use. Users must follow the operating manual, observe all contraindications, and begin at a low intensity.
Are results the same for every user?
No. Results vary according to the treatment area, selected intensity, number of sessions, muscle condition, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is training included?
Yes. Machine operation, applicator placement, intensity adjustment, safety instructions, cleaning, maintenance, and technical support are included.
Add Professional EMS Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine enables salons, wellness centers, fitness facilities, and body-contouring professionals to introduce customizable muscle-conditioning and body-toning services.
Five key benefits:
-
Targeted Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology
-
Multiple applicators for five or more body areas
-
Ten adjustable intensity levels
-
Portable design with a clear LCD interface
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,999.00
Pelvic Floor Training, RF Heating and Relaxing Massage in One Chair
The RF EMSEAT Pelvic Floor Trainer combines HI-FEM electromagnetic muscle stimulation with radio-frequency heating for convenient, non-invasive pelvic floor exercise. Designed for women and men, it activates deep pelvic floor muscles while delivering controlled warmth to the back, waist and feet.
Users remain comfortably seated and fully clothed during treatment. A typical 30-minute session can stimulate up to 12,000 pelvic floor muscle contractions, providing an efficient alternative to performing thousands of voluntary Kegel exercises.
Product Highlights
- HI-FEM pelvic floor muscle stimulation
- Up to 12,000 contractions in 30 minutes
- 3.5 Tesla maximum magnetic intensity
- 5–150 Hz adjustable frequency
- RF heating for the back, waist and feet
- Intelligent temperature control
- 4.3-inch control panel
- Comfortable, non-invasive operation
- Suitable for both women and men
- Use while fully clothed
- Integrated tablet stand
- 100–240V wide-voltage compatibility
How the RF EMSEAT Works
The seat generates focused electromagnetic energy that penetrates the pelvic floor area and stimulates repeated muscle contractions. These contractions exercise muscles that can be difficult to activate consistently through voluntary Kegel exercises alone.
Unlike conventional exercise, the user does not need to consciously contract the muscles throughout the session. The intensity and frequency can be adjusted through the control panel according to the selected program and individual comfort level.
The machine also integrates RF heating into the backrest and foot platform, combining pelvic floor exercise with a warm, relaxing seated experience.
Three Technologies in One System
HI-FEM Pelvic Floor Stimulation
The chair delivers high-intensity electromagnetic pulses through the treatment area in the seat. These pulses stimulate deep pelvic floor muscle contractions to support strength, control and endurance.
RF Back and Waist Heating
The integrated backrest provides RF-generated warmth for the back and waist. Intelligent temperature control helps maintain a comfortable treatment temperature of approximately 42–45°C.
RF Foot Massage and Heating
The foot platform provides warming RF energy while the user is seated. Shoes and socks should be removed so the feet can make direct contact with the foot panels.
Supports Women’s Pelvic Wellness
The RF EMSEAT can be incorporated into pelvic floor exercise routines for women seeking support with:
- Postpartum pelvic floor conditioning
- Pelvic muscle strengthening
- Menopause-related pelvic wellness
- Age-related changes in muscle strength
- Core stability and pelvic control
- Intimate wellness
- Daily pelvic floor exercise
Postpartum users should obtain clearance from a qualified healthcare professional before beginning any pelvic floor training program.
Supports Men’s Pelvic Wellness
Pelvic floor training is also important for men. The RF EMSEAT may support exercise programs focused on:
- Pelvic floor muscle activation
- Lower abdominal and core control
- Pelvic muscle endurance
- Prostate wellness routines
- Age-related pelvic muscle conditioning
- General intimate wellness
The chair is designed to accommodate both female and male users, making it suitable for homes, wellness centers and professional studios.
Up to 12,000 Contractions per Session
Traditional Kegel exercises depend on the user correctly identifying and voluntarily contracting the pelvic floor muscles. Maintaining proper technique and completing enough repetitions can be difficult.
The RF EMSEAT automatically produces repeated, controlled contractions throughout the session. In approximately 30 minutes, it can stimulate up to 12,000 muscle contractions, helping users complete an intensive pelvic floor exercise session while seated.
The 12,000-contraction figure describes the machine’s stimulation pulses and does not guarantee a particular medical or physical result.
Comfortable and Convenient Operation
The RF EMSEAT is designed to make pelvic floor exercise straightforward:
- Sit comfortably in the chair while fully clothed.
- Remove shoes and socks before placing your feet on the RF platform.
- Select the desired settings using the 4.3-inch control panel.
- Begin with a comfortable intensity.
- Increase the intensity gradually according to tolerance.
- Remain seated throughout the selected session.
The chair includes an adjustable tablet stand for entertainment or other content during treatment. The tablet shown in product images is not included.
Integrated Design
Every part of the RF EMSEAT is designed to support a comfortable treatment experience:
- Magnetic treatment seat: Delivers electromagnetic pulses to the pelvic floor muscles.
- Heated backrest: Provides RF warmth to the back and waist.
- Foot energy platform: Delivers RF heating through direct contact with bare feet.
- 4.3-inch screen: Provides convenient access to treatment settings.
- Tablet holder: Keeps a personal device within easy reach.
- Supportive armrests: Help users maintain a relaxed seated position.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | RF EMSEAT |
| Product type | Pelvic floor training chair |
| Core technology | HI-FEM electromagnetic stimulation |
| Additional technology | RF heating and massage |
| Magnetic intensity | Up to 3.5 Tesla |
| Frequency | 5–150 Hz |
| Rated power | 1500W |
| Voltage | 100–240V |
| Control panel | 4.3-inch screen |
| Typical session | Approximately 30 minutes |
| Muscle stimulation | Up to 12,000 contractions per session |
| RF treatment areas | Back, waist and feet |
| RF temperature | Approximately 42–45°C |
| Operation | Non-invasive and fully clothed |
| Package size | 97 × 82 × 83 cm |
| Tablet stand | Included |
| Tablet | Not included |
| Intended users | Women and men |
Specifications may vary slightly by configuration. Confirm the required plug type and final electrical specifications before ordering.
Suitable for Home and Professional Settings
The RF EMSEAT can be used in:
- Private homes
- Beauty and wellness centers
- Postpartum recovery centers
- Fitness studios
- Pelvic wellness practices
- Rehabilitation and physiotherapy settings
Professional operators should follow applicable local regulations, complete appropriate training and screen every client before treatment.
Important Safety Information
Do not use the RF EMSEAT if you are pregnant or have a pacemaker, implanted electronic device or metal implant near the treatment area. People with recent surgery, active infection, unexplained pelvic pain, abnormal bleeding or a diagnosed pelvic health condition should consult a qualified healthcare professional before use.
Extra caution is required because the machine includes RF heating. Users with reduced heat sensitivity, impaired circulation or conditions affected by heat should seek professional advice before treatment.
This product is designed to support pelvic floor exercise and general wellness. It is not intended to diagnose, cure or replace professional medical treatment for urinary incontinence, pelvic organ prolapse, prostatitis, pelvic pain or other medical conditions. Results vary between individuals.
Order the RF EMSEAT Pelvic Floor Trainer
Bring together intensive pelvic floor exercise and relaxing RF warmth in one comfortable system. The RF EMSEAT Kegel Chair offers adjustable 3.5 Tesla magnetic stimulation, up to 12,000 contractions per session and targeted heating for the back, waist and feet.
Select your required voltage and plug configuration and order your RF EMSEAT today.
Receives in 8 days.
$1,699.00
Professional EMS and Radial Shockwave Therapy System
Dual-Technology Platform for Physiotherapy, Muscle Conditioning, and Rehabilitation
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK is a professional 2-in-1 physiotherapy system that combines Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave therapy on one compact platform.
Its reusable vacuum EMS cups provide hands-free muscle stimulation, while the dedicated shockwave handpiece delivers adjustable acoustic energy to targeted soft-tissue and musculoskeletal areas. Both functions have independent control interfaces and can support combined treatment programs.
With nine EMS modes, dual-channel control, adjustable frequency up to 30Hz, shockwave energy up to 200mJ, a 10.4-inch touchscreen, and an 8kg portable design, EMSHOCK is suitable for physiotherapy, rehabilitation, sports recovery, and professional wellness applications.
EMS and radial shockwave | Hands-free vacuum cups | Nine EMS modes | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies on One Platform
Electrical Muscle Stimulation
The EMS function delivers controlled electrical impulses through reusable vacuum treatment cups. These impulses produce repeated muscle contractions and relaxation cycles without requiring voluntary exercise during treatment.
Common applications include:
-
Muscle-conditioning programs
-
Post-injury muscle rehabilitation
-
Muscle-weakness support
-
Atrophy-prevention programs
-
Sports-recovery treatments
-
General muscle stimulation
Radial Shockwave Therapy
The shockwave handpiece delivers controlled acoustic energy to selected soft-tissue and musculoskeletal areas. Practitioners can adjust energy, frequency, preload, and total impact count according to the treatment protocol.
Common applications include:
-
Tendon and soft-tissue treatments
-
Musculoskeletal rehabilitation
-
Sports-injury recovery
-
Chronic pain-management support
-
Professionally administered ED protocols
-
Selected body-contouring treatments
Simultaneous Dual-Technology Operation
The self-vacuum EMS cups operate hands-free while the practitioner controls the radial shockwave handpiece. This allows both technologies to be incorporated into the same treatment appointment.
This integrated configuration supports:
-
Muscle and connective-tissue treatments
-
Hands-free EMS stimulation
-
Practitioner-controlled shockwave delivery
-
Treatment of the same or different suitable areas
-
Customizable combined protocols
-
Efficient professional workflows
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Muscle-Conditioning Program
Uses the EMS function to provide controlled muscle stimulation through one or two independently managed channels.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle strengthening support
-
Muscle endurance programs
-
Post-injury muscle conditioning
-
Reduced muscle-use concerns
-
General rehabilitation support
Recommended for:
-
Physiotherapy clients
-
Rehabilitation clients
-
Athletes and active adults
-
Clients with professionally assessed muscle weakness
Physiotherapy Shockwave Program
Uses adjustable radial shockwave parameters for professionally assessed musculoskeletal and soft-tissue concerns.
Recommended applications:
-
Tendon and connective-tissue treatments
-
Shoulder, elbow, wrist, and hand programs
-
Hip, knee, ankle, and foot treatments
-
Plantar-area treatments
-
Chronic musculoskeletal concerns
Recommended for:
-
Physiotherapy clients
-
Clients with professionally assessed soft-tissue conditions
-
Rehabilitation and recovery clients
Combined EMS and Shockwave Program
Combines hands-free EMS treatment with practitioner-controlled radial shockwave therapy during the same appointment.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle and tendon rehabilitation
-
Post-injury recovery
-
Sports-rehabilitation programs
-
Combined muscle and soft-tissue treatment
-
Functional recovery support
Recommended for:
-
Clients requiring multi-layer treatment
-
Sports and rehabilitation clients
-
Clinics offering combined physiotherapy programs
Sports-Recovery Program
Uses EMS muscle stimulation, radial shockwave therapy, or both technologies according to the treatment objective.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle recovery
-
Tendon overuse conditions
-
Post-activity conditioning
-
Sports-injury rehabilitation
-
Return-to-activity support
Recommended for:
-
Athletes
-
Active adults
-
Fitness clients
-
Sports-recovery facilities
Nine Adjustable EMS Treatment Modes
The EMS function provides nine treatment modes with adjustable frequency and energy. Mode selection should follow client assessment and the supplied professional protocols.
| EMS Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Treatment Modes | Nine | Different muscle-stimulation patterns |
| Maximum Frequency | 30Hz | Adjustable stimulation speed |
| Energy Levels | 1–10 | Progressive intensity control |
| Output Channels | Two independent channels | Treatment of two suitable muscle groups |
| Maximum Output | 100V | Professional EMS delivery |
| Applicators | Reusable vacuum cups | Hands-free muscle stimulation |
| Channel Control | Channel A and Channel B | Independent parameter management |
Dual-Channel Independent Control
Channel A and Channel B can be managed separately, allowing professionals to customize settings for different muscle groups or suitable treatment areas.
Common benefits include:
-
Independent intensity adjustment
-
Separate treatment settings
-
Two-area muscle stimulation
-
Personalized client programs
-
Flexible rehabilitation planning
Reusable Self-Vacuum Cups
The EMS cups use suction to maintain contact with suitable treatment areas.
Common benefits include:
-
Hands-free operation
-
Reusable applicators
-
No adhesive electrode pads
-
Reduced disposable-accessory requirements
-
Efficient applicator placement
Adjustable Shockwave Treatment Settings
The radial shockwave function allows practitioners to personalize the treatment according to the selected area and professional protocol.
| Shockwave Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Maximum Energy | 200mJ | Adjustable acoustic-wave output |
| Frequency | Adjustable | Personalized impact-delivery speed |
| Preload | Adjustable | Controlled handpiece response |
| Impact Counter | Real-time tracking | Accurate session documentation |
| Body-Part Menu | Integrated | Protocol and treatment-area selection |
| Control Interface | Independent touchscreen interface | Shockwave parameter management |
| Typical Area Time | Approximately 10 minutes | Efficient targeted treatments |
Shockwave settings must be selected according to client assessment, target tissue, treatment objective, and individual response.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Upper-Body Areas
The EMS cups and shockwave handpiece support various upper-body muscle and soft-tissue programs.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Shoulder
-
Upper back
-
Elbow
-
Forearm
-
Hand and wrist
-
Suitable upper-arm muscle groups
Lower-Body Areas
The two technologies can be selected independently or incorporated into a combined treatment plan.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Hip
-
Thigh
-
Knee
-
Calf
-
Achilles tendon
-
Foot and ankle
-
Plantar area
Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Suitable professional protocols may also support selected body-contouring and intimate wellness services.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist
-
Buttocks
-
Thighs
-
Localized body areas
-
Professionally assessed ED treatment zones
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Category | Common Applications | Recommended Technology |
|---|---|---|
| Muscle Conditioning | Muscle activation, endurance, and strength support | EMS |
| Physiotherapy | Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue programs | Shockwave or combined |
| Sports Recovery | Muscle, tendon, and activity-related rehabilitation | EMS and shockwave |
| Post-Injury Rehabilitation | Muscle conditioning and functional recovery | Combined program |
| Body Contouring | Muscle-toning and selected body programs | EMS or combined |
| Erectile-Function Programs | Professionally administered acoustic-wave protocols | Shockwave |
Common Musculoskeletal Applications
EMSHOCK may be incorporated into professional treatment plans for suitable clients with:
-
Tennis elbow
-
Tendinitis and tendinopathy
-
Plantar fasciitis
-
Frozen shoulder
-
Achilles tendon concerns
-
Ankle, knee, shoulder, and wrist concerns
-
Muscle weakness
-
Post-injury muscle atrophy
-
Chronic musculoskeletal conditions
-
Suitable calcium-deposit concerns
-
Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation
-
Sports-related overuse conditions
Diagnosis, client suitability, treatment settings, and expected outcomes should be determined by an appropriately qualified professional.
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications.
Step 2: Technology and Area Selection
Choose EMS, radial shockwave, or a combined treatment. Identify the appropriate muscle groups and professionally assessed shockwave treatment areas.
Step 3: Applicator and Parameter Setup
Position the vacuum EMS cups over suitable muscle groups. Select Channel A or B settings, EMS mode, frequency, and energy. Configure shockwave energy, frequency, preload, and impact count.
Step 4: Active Treatment
Begin the selected EMS program. When appropriate, the practitioner can deliver radial shockwave therapy to the same or another suitable area while the EMS cups operate hands-free.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop both functions, remove the EMS cups, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide appropriate post-treatment guidance.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The EMSHOCK combines two professional treatment technologies within a lightweight and portable desktop system.
Key advantages include:
-
EMS and radial shockwave technologies
-
Hands-free reusable vacuum EMS cups
-
Nine EMS treatment modes
-
Adjustable EMS frequency up to 30Hz
-
Ten EMS energy levels
-
Dual-channel independent EMS control
-
Shockwave energy up to 200mJ
-
Adjustable shockwave frequency and preload
-
Integrated impact counter
-
Body-part selection menu
-
Independent treatment interfaces
-
10.4-inch color touchscreen
-
150W power consumption
-
Compact 46 × 53 × 38cm design
-
Lightweight 8kg construction
-
100–220V power compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year parts warranty
-
Professional training and lifetime support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSHOCK |
| Model | ESWT-KA |
| Technology | Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave |
| Power Input | 100–220V, 60Hz |
| Power Consumption | 150W |
| Maximum Shockwave Energy | 200mJ |
| Shockwave Controls | Energy, frequency, preload, and impact count |
| EMS Maximum Output | 100V |
| EMS Frequency | Adjustable up to 30Hz |
| EMS Treatment Modes | Nine |
| EMS Energy Levels | Levels 1–10 |
| EMS Channels | Two independently controlled channels |
| EMS Applicators | Reusable self-vacuum cups |
| Display | 10.4-inch color touchscreen |
| Control System | Independent EMS and shockwave interfaces |
| Dimensions | 46 × 53 × 38cm |
| Net Weight | 8kg |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSHOCK main unit
-
1 × Radial shockwave treatment handpiece
-
Reusable self-vacuum EMS treatment cups
-
Dual-channel EMS connection system
-
Integrated 10.4-inch color touchscreen
-
Nine EMS treatment modes
-
Independent Channel A and Channel B controls
-
Adjustable shockwave control system
-
Integrated body-part selection menu
-
Real-time impact counter
-
Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
The final number and configuration of EMS cups and shockwave heads should follow the selected package.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
EMS operation training
-
Shockwave operation training
-
Vacuum-cup placement guidance
-
EMS mode and intensity guidance
-
Shockwave parameter guidance
-
Physiotherapy protocol training
-
Sports-recovery protocol training
-
Combined-treatment guidance
-
Client-screening documentation
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMSHOCK system includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use both technologies safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen and interface operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Vacuum EMS cup placement
-
Channel A and Channel B controls
-
EMS mode selection
-
EMS frequency and energy adjustment
-
Shockwave handpiece operation
-
Shockwave energy and frequency adjustment
-
Preload and impact-count settings
-
Combined EMS and shockwave treatments
-
Physiotherapy and sports-recovery protocols
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Shockwave heads, projectiles, seals, vacuum cups, tubing, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed health consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. EMSHOCK should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active thrombosis or blood clots
-
Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate clearance
-
Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Severely impaired sensation
-
Active growth plates in children
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Metal implants requiring professional clearance
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Neurological conditions affected by electrical stimulation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Do not place EMS applicators or deliver shockwave energy over prohibited anatomical regions, including areas identified as unsuitable in the operating manual.
Additional considerations for ED treatments include:
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Penile implants or prostheses
-
Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding
-
Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment
Client eligibility, diagnosis, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cups, tubing, cables, and accessories before use.
-
Select the correct technology and treatment protocol.
-
Position vacuum cups only on suitable muscle areas.
-
Begin with conservative energy and frequency settings.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client response.
-
Use suitable coupling medium for shockwave treatment.
-
Monitor client comfort throughout the session.
-
Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record EMS and shockwave settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Rehabilitation centers
-
Sports-medicine facilities
-
Musculoskeletal treatment practices
-
Fitness and recovery centers
-
Men’s wellness clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Integrated wellness facilities
Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering EMS or shockwave treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSHOCK?
Two Technologies on One Platform
The system combines Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave therapy for muscle, tendon, soft-tissue, and recovery programs.
Hands-Free Vacuum EMS Cups
Reusable self-vacuum cups maintain contact without adhesive pads, allowing the EMS function to operate while the practitioner performs suitable shockwave treatments.
Independent Dual-Channel Control
Channel A and Channel B can be configured separately for personalized muscle-stimulation programs.
Portable Professional Design
At 8kg with a compact desktop footprint, EMSHOCK is suitable for treatment rooms, multi-room facilities, and professional transport.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is EMSHOCK?
EMSHOCK is a professional 2-in-1 system combining Electrical Muscle Stimulation with radial shockwave therapy.
What is the difference between the two technologies?
EMS delivers controlled electrical impulses to targeted muscles. Radial shockwave delivers acoustic pressure waves to professionally identified soft-tissue and musculoskeletal areas.
Can both functions be used during the same appointment?
Yes. The vacuum EMS cups can operate hands-free while a practitioner delivers shockwave treatment to the same or another suitable area, when supported by the selected protocol.
How are the vacuum cups different from adhesive electrodes?
The reusable cups use suction to maintain contact and do not require disposable adhesive pads. Correct placement, suction level, cleaning, and client screening remain essential.
How many EMS modes are available?
The system includes nine EMS treatment modes, adjustable frequency up to 30Hz, and ten energy levels.
Can two muscle groups be treated?
The machine includes two independently controlled EMS channels. Suitable treatment configurations depend on the number of cups supplied and the selected protocol.
What is the maximum shockwave energy?
The radial shockwave function provides maximum energy up to 200mJ.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the shoulder, elbow, wrist, back, hip, thigh, knee, calf, Achilles tendon, foot, ankle, abdomen, buttocks, and other professionally assessed areas.
How long does a treatment take?
Shockwave treatment may take approximately 10 minutes per area. EMS sessions commonly take 20–30 minutes. Combined appointment time depends on the selected protocol and number of areas.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocols indicate three to four shockwave sessions for some conditions and six to twelve EMS sessions for muscle-conditioning programs. The final plan should be individualized following professional assessment.
Can EMSHOCK support ED treatment protocols?
The shockwave function may support professionally administered ED protocols. This application should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements.
Is treatment uncomfortable?
EMS commonly produces pulsing and muscle-contraction sensations. Shockwave may cause temporary discomfort over sensitive areas. Both technologies have adjustable settings to support appropriate client tolerance.
Are treatment results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to the condition, treatment area, selected settings, number of sessions, client health, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers EMS, shockwave therapy, vacuum-cup placement, parameter selection, combined protocols, safety, client screening, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Dual-Technology Physiotherapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK enables qualified professionals to combine hands-free muscle stimulation and radial shockwave therapy using one lightweight platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave technology
-
Nine EMS modes with independent dual-channel control
-
Reusable hands-free vacuum EMS cups
-
Adjustable shockwave energy up to 200mJ
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$1,999.00
Professional Two-Handle Portable HI-EMT Body-Sculpting System
Compact Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across targeted body areas.
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology produces approximately 20,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute session. Its two ergonomic applicators support focused or bilateral treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks.
With a lightweight portable design, adjustable energy settings, intelligent digital controls, and an air-cooling system, the machine is suitable for mobile beauty professionals, small salons, clinics, wellness facilities, and approved home users.
Portable HI-EMT | Two ergonomic handles | Approximately 20,000 contractions | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Body-definition programs
-
Professional fitness treatments
Focused Body Contouring
The two applicators can be positioned over suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Buttock shaping
-
Thigh definition
-
Upper-arm conditioning
-
Bilateral muscle stimulation
-
Sequential multi-area treatments
Portable Professional Operation
The compact construction supports professional services in facilities with limited space and suitable mobile treatment environments.
Common benefits include:
-
Easier professional transportation
-
Reduced storage requirements
-
Small treatment-room compatibility
-
Focused two-handle operation
-
Flexible service locations
-
Approved personal-use capability
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses one or two applicators to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Midsection definition
-
General abdomen sculpting
-
Fitness-support programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock-Toning Program
Positions both applicators over suitable buttock muscle areas to support balanced conditioning.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Toning and firmness support
-
Bilateral buttock treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving lower-body programs
Thigh and Arm Program
Uses the two applicators sequentially or bilaterally across suitable thigh or upper-arm areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Bilateral limb treatments
-
Arm and thigh definition
-
General muscle conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved arm or thigh tone
-
Clients interested in upper- or lower-body conditioning
-
Fitness and body-contouring clients
Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment after completion of the client’s initial EMSlim course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-tone maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Fitness-program support
-
Seasonal body-sculpting treatments
Recommended for:
-
Returning EMSlim clients
-
Clients completing four to six initial sessions
-
Approved home users following the supplied instructions
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device allows treatments to be customized according to the body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | HI-EMT | Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Treatment Handles | Two | Focused, sequential, or bilateral treatments |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Four to six sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized user comfort |
| Cooling System | Air cooling | Supports stable portable operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen
One or two applicators can be positioned over suitable abdominal muscle groups for focused midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Improved muscle definition
-
Midsection body sculpting
-
Bilateral abdominal treatment
Buttocks and Thighs
The two applicators support focused, sequential, or bilateral lower-body programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Lower-body definition
-
Bilateral muscle treatment
-
General lower-body sculpting
Upper Arms
The applicators can be positioned over suitable upper-arm muscle groups according to the supplied placement guidance.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Biceps conditioning
-
Triceps conditioning
-
Bilateral arm treatment
-
Improved-looking arm definition
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | One or two handles |
| Core Area | Focused muscle activation | Bilateral or targeted placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Two-handle bilateral treatment |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Sequential or bilateral treatment |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh definition and muscle stimulation | Sequential or bilateral treatment |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Sequential or bilateral treatment |
| Multiple Areas | Structured body-sculpting program | Sequential treatment sessions |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment area and position one or both applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. Correct placement is essential for balanced muscle stimulation.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with a conservative energy level. Increase the intensity progressively according to client comfort and muscle response.
Step 4: HI-EMT Treatment
The machine delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment area, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional and Portable Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device combines HI-EMT performance with a compact and transportable design.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional HI-EMT technology
-
Two ergonomic treatment applicators
-
Approximately 20,000 contractions per session
-
Focused and bilateral treatment capability
-
Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
Intelligent digital control interface
-
Air-cooling system
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Four- to six-session treatment programs
-
Lightweight and compact construction
-
Easier transportation and storage
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device |
| Technology | High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology |
| Design | Portable, lightweight, and compact |
| Treatment Handles | Two ergonomic applicators |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000 |
| Primary Functions | Muscle conditioning and body contouring |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, sequential, or bilateral |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Four to six sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air cooling |
| Display | Intelligent digital interface |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Use Cases | Mobile professionals, small salons, clinics, and approved home use |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim main unit
-
2 × Ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
Intelligent digital control interface
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Integrated air-cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Mobile-use guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device includes operating guidance to help professionals and approved home users operate the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Intelligent control operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Focused and bilateral configurations
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Client monitoring
-
Safe transportation and storage
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, transport damage, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper transportation, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before treatment. The machine should only be operated according to the supplied instructions.
Treatment may not be suitable for users with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Users with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Place the machine on a stable, dry surface.
-
Ensure ventilation openings remain unobstructed.
-
Remove metal objects from the treatment area.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure both handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with a conservative energy level.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to user comfort.
-
Monitor muscle response and user condition throughout treatment.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment area, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every professional client.
-
Transport the machine using suitable protective packaging.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device is suitable for appropriately trained operators and approved users in:
-
Mobile beauty services
-
Small beauty salons
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Wellness centers
-
Medical spas
-
Fitness facilities
-
Professional clinics
-
Personal home wellness environments
Professional operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HI-EMT treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device?
Compact Portable Design
The lightweight construction supports easier transportation, storage, and use in facilities with limited space.
Two Ergonomic Applicators
Two handles support focused, sequential, and bilateral treatments for suitable muscle groups.
Professional HI-EMT Technology
The system provides approximately 20,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session.
Simple Controls and Air Cooling
The intelligent digital interface and air-cooling system support straightforward portable operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator-placement guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device?
It is a compact HI-EMT body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation and body-conditioning treatments.
What makes the machine portable?
Its lightweight, compact construction is designed for easier carrying, storage, and transportation between suitable treatment locations.
How does HI-EMT technology work?
The machine delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions during treatment.
How many applicators are included?
The package includes two ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators.
Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, upper arms, thighs, and buttocks.
Can both applicators operate simultaneously?
Yes. The two handles support focused or bilateral treatment according to the selected protocol.
How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Users experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy can be increased progressively according to comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Users can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced following exercise may occur.
Can HI-EMT replace regular exercise?
HI-EMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may users notice changes?
Some users may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course.
What performance figures are supplied?
Muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes.
How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Can the machine be used at home?
The supplied information indicates home-wellness suitability. Home users must follow the operating manual, contraindications, applicator-placement instructions, and recommended treatment schedule.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses air cooling to support stable portable operation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, transportation, maintenance, safety, and troubleshooting.
Add Portable HI-EMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device enables mobile professionals, small salons, clinics, and wellness practitioners to provide focused electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments with a compact system.
Five key benefits:
-
Portable HI-EMT technology with approximately 20,000 contractions
-
Two ergonomic applicators for focused or bilateral treatments
-
Compact design for transportation and space-efficient storage
-
Intelligent digital controls with air cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, portability details, package configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
Answer a few quick questions and we'll recommend the right Lipo Laser setup for you.
$2,599.00
Professional Four-Handle HIEMT PRO Body-Sculpting System
Dual-Client Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Multi-Area Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO is a professional body-sculpting system developed for simultaneous muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
Advanced High-Intensity Electromagnetic Technology produces approximately 30,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute session. Its four-handle configuration supports multi-area treatment for one client or simultaneous treatment for two suitable clients.
With adjustable energy settings, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, dual-client operation, and combined air-and-water cooling, the PRO system is designed for premium clinics, medical spas, body-sculpting studios, fitness centers, resort spas, and high-volume wellness facilities.
Advanced HIEMT | Four ergonomic handles | Dual-client operation | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HIEMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing powerful involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Professional fitness treatments
Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy, treatment objectives, and selected protocol.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Arms and abdomen treatments
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Bilateral muscle stimulation
-
Customized four-area programs
Dual-Client Operation
The four-handle configuration can be arranged to treat one client across multiple areas or two suitable clients simultaneously.
Common benefits include:
-
Single-client multi-area treatments
-
Simultaneous dual-client sessions
-
Flexible applicator allocation
-
Improved treatment-room efficiency
-
Customized treatment programs
-
High-volume clinic operation
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses suitable applicator placement to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Midsection definition
-
Waistline sculpting
-
General abdominal programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for bilateral lower-body treatment.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs
Multi-Area Body Program
Uses all four applicators for one client across multiple suitable treatment areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and thighs
-
Abdomen and arms
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Customized four-area treatment
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking comprehensive body conditioning
-
Clients with multiple treatment objectives
-
Premium body-sculpting clients
Dual-Client Program
Divides the four applicators between two appropriately screened clients.
Recommended applications:
-
Two-client abdomen programs
-
Simultaneous lower-body treatments
-
Independent client protocols
-
High-volume treatment scheduling
-
Professional dual-client services
Recommended for:
-
Clinics with appropriate staffing
-
High-volume body-sculpting facilities
-
Premium spas and wellness centers
Each client must receive an individual consultation, screening, treatment plan, applicator placement, and continuous professional monitoring.
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO allows practitioners to customize treatments according to the selected body areas, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | Advanced HIEMT | Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Treatment Handles | Four | Multi-area or dual-client treatments |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 30,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Treatment Capacity | One or two suitable clients | Flexible professional operation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Four to six sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized client comfort |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
Multiple handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved abdominal tone
-
Multi-zone midsection treatment
Buttocks and Thighs
The applicators support balanced lower-body treatments across suitable buttock and thigh muscle groups.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body sculpting
Arms and Multiple Body Areas
Four handles allow professionals to create customized upper- and lower-body treatment combinations.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Simultaneous arm and abdomen treatment
-
Simultaneous thigh and buttock treatment
-
Customized multi-area programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Two or more handles |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Targeted or combined placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral handle placement |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Bilateral treatment |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh definition and muscle stimulation | Bilateral treatment |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Bilateral treatment |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Up to four handles |
| Dual Clients | Simultaneous independent treatment programs | Handles divided between two clients |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review each client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment areas and position the applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. During dual-client operation, each client must receive individually assessed applicator placement.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with conservative energy levels. Adjust the settings according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response.
Step 4: HIEMT Treatment
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor every client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO combines multi-area and dual-client performance with professional controls and continuous-operation cooling.
Key advantages include:
-
Advanced HIEMT technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment handles
-
Approximately 30,000 contractions per session
-
Single-client multi-area capability
-
Simultaneous dual-client capability
-
Focused and bilateral treatment configurations
-
Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Four- to six-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO |
| Designation | PRO professional configuration |
| Technology | High-Intensity Electromagnetic Technology |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 30,000 |
| Treatment Capacity | One client across multiple areas or two suitable clients |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, simultaneous, bilateral, or dual-client |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Four to six sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Results Timeline | Supplied estimate: visible changes in 2–4 weeks and progressive changes over 6–12 weeks |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures and timelines are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO main unit
-
4 × Ergonomic HIEMT treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Single-client multi-area protocols
-
Dual-client treatment guidance
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Single-client multi-area operation
-
Dual-client treatment setup
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Multi-client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review must be completed for every client before treatment. The system should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Complete separate screening for every client.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with conservative energy levels.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Continuously monitor every client during dual-client operation.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment areas, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Premium body-sculpting clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Luxury wellness facilities
-
Resort spas
-
Aesthetic salons
-
Fitness centers
-
Slimming centers
-
High-volume treatment facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, staffing, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIEMT or dual-client treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO?
Advanced HIEMT Technology
The system provides approximately 30,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session.
Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four handles support focused, bilateral, multi-area, and suitable dual-client treatment programs.
Flexible Dual-Client Operation
The applicators can be divided between two appropriately screened clients, providing additional scheduling flexibility for high-volume facilities.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes machine training, dual-client guidance, applicator-placement protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO?
It is a professional HIEMT body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation, multi-area body conditioning, and suitable dual-client operation.
What does the PRO designation mean?
PRO identifies this product as the supplied advanced four-handle configuration with approximately 30,000 contractions, a 12-inch touchscreen, dual-client capability, and air-and-water cooling.
How many applicators are included?
The package includes four ergonomic HIEMT treatment handles.
Can all four handles be used on one client?
Yes. All four handles can be positioned across suitable treatment areas according to the client’s individual treatment plan.
Can two clients be treated simultaneously?
Yes. The four handles can be divided between two suitable clients. Each client requires individual screening, settings, applicator placement, documentation, and continuous monitoring.
Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
How long does one session take?
A standard session takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur.
Can HIEMT replace regular exercise?
HIEMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
The supplied information indicates that visible changes may begin within two to four weeks and continue developing over six to twelve weeks. Individual results vary.
What performance figures are supplied?
The supplied product information lists potential muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The system uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, multi-handle placement, dual-client protocols, energy adjustment, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Advanced Dual-Client HIEMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO enables premium clinics, resort spas, wellness centers, and body-sculpting professionals to provide multi-area or simultaneous dual-client muscle-conditioning treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
Advanced HIEMT with approximately 30,000 contractions per session
-
Four ergonomic handles for multi-area treatment
-
Flexible single-client or dual-client operation
-
A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
From $600.00
Professional HIEMT and Radiofrequency Body Sculpting System
Four Treatment Handles for Muscle Stimulation and Body-Contouring Programs
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine is a professional dual-technology platform developed for fitness centers, medical spas, wellness clinics and body-sculpting studios.
The system combines High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic technology with controlled radiofrequency energy. HIEMT produces repeated contractions in selected muscle groups, while RF provides controlled thermal energy for suitable body-care and skin-firming protocols.
Four treatment handles support individual or simultaneous multi-area programs for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms, calves and obliques. The system can be upgraded to six or eight handles.
HIEMT and RF technology | Four treatment handles | 7-Tesla magnetic field | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Body-Sculpting Platform
HIEMT Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic technology delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses to selected muscle groups.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle stimulation
-
Gluteal muscle programs
-
Thigh conditioning
-
Upper-arm stimulation
-
Calf-muscle programs
-
General body conditioning
Radiofrequency Energy
The RF function provides controlled heating across suitable treatment areas.
Common applications include:
-
Skin-firming support
-
Body-contour refinement
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Thigh treatments
-
Upper-arm programs
-
General body-care services
Repeated Muscle Contractions
The system produces repeated contractions in the targeted muscle group during a treatment session.
Common applications include:
-
Core-conditioning support
-
Muscle-activation programs
-
Muscle-toning services
-
Fitness-oriented treatments
-
Body-sculpting programs
-
Maintenance sessions
Four-Handle Multi-Area Treatment
Four handles allow practitioners to create individual or simultaneous treatment protocols.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and obliques
-
Left and right thighs
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Upper arms
-
Calves
-
Customized multi-area programs
The appropriate handle placement, HIEMT intensity, RF temperature and session duration should be selected according to the muscle group, client condition and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The system supports customized HIEMT and RF programs for different body areas.
Program 1: Abdomen and Core
A muscle-conditioning program for suitable abdominal and deep-core muscle areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle stimulation
-
Core-conditioning support
-
Abdomen contour programs
-
Oblique muscle stimulation
Recommended for:
-
Fitness enthusiasts
-
Body-sculpting clients
-
Busy professionals
-
Appropriately assessed post-pregnancy clients
Program 2: Buttocks and Gluteal Muscles
A targeted program for suitable gluteal muscle groups.
Recommended applications:
-
Gluteal muscle stimulation
-
Buttock-conditioning programs
-
Muscle-tone support
-
Lower-body contour care
Recommended for:
-
Fitness clients
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Wellness-center members
-
Clients seeking lower-body conditioning
Program 3: Thighs and Calves
A lower-body program for suitable thigh and calf muscle groups.
Recommended applications:
-
Quadriceps stimulation
-
Hamstring programs
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Calf-muscle activation
Recommended for:
-
Athletes
-
Fitness enthusiasts
-
Lower-body conditioning programs
-
Professional wellness services
Program 4: Upper Arms
A targeted program for suitable biceps, triceps and forearm areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Biceps stimulation
-
Triceps stimulation
-
Forearm conditioning
-
Upper-arm contour support
Recommended for:
-
Fitness-center clients
-
Upper-body programs
-
Body-sculpting services
-
Customized muscle-conditioning plans
Adjustable Energy for Customized Treatments
The EMSlim HIEMT Machine provides adjustable HIEMT intensity and radiofrequency settings for different body areas and client tolerance levels.
| Treatment Setting | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower Intensity | First-time clients and initial muscle activation |
| Moderate Intensity | General professional muscle-conditioning programs |
| Higher Intensity | Appropriately selected experienced clients |
| Customized HIEMT and RF | Muscle-specific protocols based on professional assessment |
The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over contraction intensity, RF energy and client comfort.
New clients should begin with conservative HIEMT and RF settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Four treatment handles support professional programs across multiple body areas.
Core and Upper-Body Treatments
-
Abdomen
-
Core muscles
-
Obliques
-
Biceps
-
Triceps
-
Forearms
Lower-Body Treatments
-
Buttocks
-
Quadriceps
-
Hamstrings
-
Inner thighs
-
Outer thighs
-
Calves
Combined Body Programs
-
Abdomen and obliques
-
Abdomen and thighs
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Left and right upper arms
-
Customized multi-area courses
-
Maintenance-oriented programs
Professional Muscle and Body-Contouring Applications
The available treatments depend on handle placement, HIEMT intensity, RF settings, session duration and professional protocol.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Technology | Intended Fitness or Aesthetic Application |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | HIEMT and RF | Core stimulation and contour support |
| Obliques | HIEMT and RF | Side-body muscle conditioning |
| Buttocks | HIEMT | Gluteal muscle stimulation |
| Thighs | HIEMT and RF | Lower-body conditioning |
| Upper arms | HIEMT and RF | Biceps and triceps stimulation |
| Calves | HIEMT | Calf-muscle activation |
| Multiple areas | Four-handle operation | Simultaneous professional treatment |
| Maintenance | Customized program | Ongoing muscle and body-care support |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete health and fitness consultation should be performed before every treatment course.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, fitness level, treatment objectives, previous procedures and contraindications.
2. Handle Placement
The selected treatment areas are prepared. Conductive gel is applied where required, and the treatment handles are positioned and secured according to the operating protocol.
3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the HIEMT intensity, RF settings, treatment program and session duration according to the muscle group and client tolerance.
4. HIEMT and RF Treatment
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses and controlled RF energy through the selected handles. A typical treatment lasts approximately 30 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the handles are removed and the treatment areas are cleaned. The client receives suitable hydration, activity and recovery guidance.
Temporary warmth, muscle fatigue, tightness, soreness or cramping may occur after treatment.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines HIEMT and RF technologies with four treatment handles and professional cooling for continuous operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
HIEMT electromagnetic stimulation
-
Controlled radiofrequency energy
-
7-Tesla magnetic field
-
Four treatment handles
-
Upgradeable six- or eight-handle configurations
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Water-cooling system
-
110V–240V power compatibility
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine |
| Product Type | Professional HIEMT and RF body-sculpting system |
| Technology | High-intensity electromagnetic technology stimulation and radiofrequency |
| Electromagnetic Field | 16 Tesla |
| Treatment Handles | Four, upgradeable to six or eight |
| Programmed Contractions | More than 20,000 to 30000 per session |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30 minutes |
| Suggested Protocol | Approximately 4–6 sessions, one or two times per week |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, arms and calves |
| Control Interface | Touchscreen with pre-programmed protocols |
| Cooling System | Water-cooled for continuous professional operation |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Warranty | Three-year comprehensive warranty |
| Support | Customer support by email, telephone and WhatsApp |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, four treatment handles and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One EMSlim HIEMT main unit
-
Four HIEMT and RF treatment handles
-
Handle-positioning straps
-
Handle-connection components
-
One starter bottle of conductive gel
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
-
Treatment table when included with the selected order
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Treatment-handle setup
-
Handle-placement guidance
-
HIEMT-intensity adjustment
-
RF-setting guidance
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Client-positioning guidance
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Setup assistance
-
Certificate of Authenticity
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Treatment-handle installation
-
Handle placement by muscle group
-
HIEMT-intensity adjustment
-
RF parameter selection
-
Abdomen and core programs
-
Gluteal muscle programs
-
Thigh and leg programs
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Multi-handle operation
-
Client-comfort monitoring
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
Three-Year Warranty
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine is supported by a three-year comprehensive warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
HIEMT energy components
-
Radiofrequency components
-
Water-cooling system
-
Original treatment handles
-
Handle cables and connectors
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect handle placement or operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of straps, cables and consumable items
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional high-intensity electromagnetic and radiofrequency equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Epilepsy or uncontrolled seizure disorders
-
Severe neurological conditions
-
Active or suspected blood clots
-
Hernia in the treatment area
-
Recent surgery
-
Open wounds or severe skin conditions
-
Acute inflammation
-
Severe muscle injury
-
Reduced sensation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Post-pregnancy clients require appropriate medical clearance. Abdominal separation, recent delivery, cesarean recovery and pelvic-floor condition should be assessed before treatment.
RF temperature and HIEMT intensity must remain within the client’s tolerance throughout the session.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Fitness centers
-
Medical spas
-
Wellness clinics
-
Body-sculpting studios
-
Beauty salons
-
Sports and recovery centers
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Qualified aesthetic professionals
-
Businesses expanding their body-conditioning services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine?
Combine HIEMT and RF
The system combines electromagnetic muscle stimulation with controlled radiofrequency energy in one professional platform.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
Four handles support professional programs for the abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable HIEMT intensity, RF settings and pre-programmed protocols allow treatments to be adapted to different muscle groups and client tolerance.
Expand the System
The standard four-handle configuration can be upgraded to six or eight handles for greater treatment capacity.
Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year comprehensive warranty, professional training, setup assistance and ongoing customer support.
Frequently Asked Questions
How does the EMSlim HIEMT Machine work?
The machine combines HIEMT electromagnetic pulses with controlled radiofrequency energy. HIEMT produces repeated contractions in selected muscles, while RF provides controlled heating for suitable body-care protocols.
What is the 14-Tesla electromagnetic field?
The supplied specification describes a 14-Tesla magnetic-field output used to deliver high-intensity electromagnetic stimulation through the treatment handles.
What does the four-handle design provide?
Four handles allow practitioners to treat individual or multiple suitable body areas during one session. The system can also be upgraded to six or eight handles.
Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, biceps, triceps, forearms and calves.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional course may include approximately 4–6 sessions, commonly scheduled one or two times per week. The final protocol depends on the client’s condition and professional assessment.
Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients feel repeated muscle contractions and warmth from RF. The intensity and RF settings should remain within the client’s tolerance.
Can muscle soreness occur?
Yes. Temporary muscle fatigue, tightness or soreness may occur, similar to the response after physical exercise.
Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue, soreness, warmth or redness may occur.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The comprehensive warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Add HIEMT and RF Body Sculpting to Your Business
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine combines:
-
High-intensity focused electromagnetic stimulation
-
Controlled radiofrequency energy
-
Four treatment handles with upgrade options
-
Professional multi-area body-conditioning programs
-
Three-year comprehensive warranty and ongoing support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its handle configurations, treatment protocols and professional training.
Order Your EMSlim HIEMT Machine and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$2,399.00
Professional Two-Handle HI-EMT Body-Sculpting System
Focused Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine is a professional body-sculpting system developed for muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across primary treatment areas.
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology produces repeated supramaximal muscle contractions without requiring voluntary exercise during treatment. The two-handle configuration supports focused or bilateral treatments for the abdomen, buttocks, and thighs.
With approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session, adjustable energy settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, air-circulation cooling, and dual-voltage compatibility, the system is suitable for slimming clinics, fitness centers, physiotherapy facilities, and aesthetic salons.
HI-EMT technology | Two ergonomic handles | 20–30-minute sessions | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing powerful involuntary contractions throughout the selected treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Body-definition programs
-
Assisted muscle activation
-
Professional fitness treatments
Focused Body Contouring
The two applicators can be positioned over primary body-sculpting areas according to the client’s anatomy and treatment goals.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Buttock shaping
-
Thigh definition
-
Core-area treatments
-
Bilateral muscle stimulation
-
Sequential multi-area programs
Adjustable Muscle-Conditioning Programs
Energy intensity can be customized according to the selected body area, client comfort, and treatment objective.
Common benefits include:
-
Progressive muscle activation
-
Personalized treatment intensity
-
Focused body-area programs
-
Bilateral treatment capability
-
Structured treatment courses
-
Maintenance-session planning
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses one or two applicators to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Midsection definition
-
General abdomen sculpting
-
Fitness-support programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock-Toning Program
Positions the applicators over suitable buttock muscle areas to support conditioning and shape-enhancement programs.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Toning and firmness support
-
Bilateral buttock treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving lower-body sculpting programs
Thigh-Conditioning Program
Uses the two handles for sequential or bilateral treatments across suitable thigh areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Thigh muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Lower-body definition
-
Bilateral leg programs
-
General thigh contouring
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved thigh tone
-
Clients interested in lower-body conditioning
-
Fitness and body-contouring clients
Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatments following completion of the client’s initial EMSlim course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-tone maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Fitness-program support
-
Seasonal body-sculpting treatments
Recommended for:
-
Returning EMSlim clients
-
Clients completing four to six initial sessions
-
Clients combining treatment with regular exercise
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatment intensity according to the body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | HI-EMT | Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Treatment Handles | Two | Focused, sequential, or bilateral treatments |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000–30,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Four to six sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized client comfort |
| Cooling System | Air circulation | Supports stable professional operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen
One or two handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal muscle groups for focused midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Improved muscle definition
-
Midsection body sculpting
-
Bilateral abdominal treatment
Buttocks
Both handles can support balanced treatment across the buttock muscles.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Toning and shaping
-
Improved-looking firmness
-
Bilateral lower-body treatment
-
General buttock conditioning
Thighs
The two applicators can be used sequentially or bilaterally across suitable thigh areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Inner-thigh programs
-
Outer-thigh programs
-
Lower-body definition
-
Bilateral muscle stimulation
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | One or two handles |
| Core Area | Focused muscle activation | Bilateral or targeted placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Two-handle bilateral treatment |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Sequential or bilateral treatment |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh definition and muscle stimulation | Sequential or bilateral treatment |
| Multiple Areas | Structured body-sculpting program | Sequential treatment sessions |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment area and position one or both applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. Correct placement is essential for balanced and effective muscle stimulation.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with a conservative energy level. Increase the intensity progressively according to the client’s comfort and muscle response.
Step 4: HI-EMT Treatment
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment area, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine combines focused HI-EMT performance with simplified professional operation.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional HI-EMT technology
-
Two ergonomic treatment handles
-
Approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session
-
Focused and bilateral treatment capability
-
Treatments for the abdomen, buttocks, and thighs
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
Intelligent touchscreen interface
-
Air-circulation cooling system
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Four- to six-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine |
| Technology | High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology |
| Treatment Handles | Two ergonomic applicators |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000–30,000 |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, buttocks, and thighs |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, sequential, or bilateral |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Four to six sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air circulation |
| Display | Intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim main unit
-
2 × Ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
Intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Integrated air-circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Bilateral and sequential configurations
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Remove metal objects from the treatment area.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure the handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with a conservative energy level.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment area, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Slimming clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Aesthetic salons
-
Medical spas
-
Fitness centers
-
Gyms
-
Wellness facilities
-
Physiotherapy and recovery centers
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HI-EMT treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine?
Focused HI-EMT Technology
The system provides intensive electromagnetic muscle stimulation for targeted abdomen, buttock, and thigh programs.
Two Ergonomic Applicators
Two handles support focused, sequential, and bilateral treatments without the operational complexity of larger multi-handle systems.
Simplified Professional Operation
The intelligent touchscreen, adjustable energy settings, and focused treatment areas make the machine straightforward to integrate into professional services.
Primary Body-Area Versatility
One system supports customized programs for the abdomen, buttocks, and thighs.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator-placement guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional HI-EMT system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation, body conditioning, and contouring treatments.
How does HI-EMT technology work?
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions during the treatment session.
How many applicators are included?
The package includes two ergonomic HI-EMT treatment handles.
Which areas can be treated?
The primary treatment areas are the abdomen, buttocks, and thighs.
Can both handles be used simultaneously?
Yes. The two handles support suitable bilateral or focused treatment configurations according to the selected protocol.
How long does one treatment take?
A standard session takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with suitable recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. The intensity can be adjusted progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced following exercise may occur.
Can HI-EMT replace regular exercise?
HI-EMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively throughout and after the treatment course.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional HI-EMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle EMSlim Machine enables slimming clinics, fitness facilities, physiotherapy centers, and aesthetic professionals to provide focused muscle-conditioning and body-contouring treatments using one professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
-
Two ergonomic handles for focused or bilateral treatments
-
Approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session
-
Adjustable energy with intelligent touchscreen controls
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,399.00
Professional EMSlim Body-Sculpting System
Smart Fat Reduction, Muscle Toning, and Skin-Firming Technology
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine is a professional, non-invasive system designed to support fat reduction, muscle development, body contouring, and firmer-looking skin within one treatment platform.
The system combines high-intensity focused electromagnetic technology with radiofrequency energy. Electromagnetic pulses stimulate powerful muscle contractions while controlled RF energy heats the underlying tissue, supporting fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments.
Equipped with four ergonomic applicators, an intelligent touchscreen, and 110V/220V compatibility, the machine is suitable for aesthetic clinics, beauty centers, spas, wellness businesses, gyms, fitness studios, and professional body-contouring providers.
HI-EMT and Radiofrequency | Four Applicators | 20–30-Minute Sessions | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT energy penetrates the treatment area and stimulates repeated supramaximal muscle contractions that cannot normally be maintained through voluntary exercise alone.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle toning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Thigh toning
-
Core-strengthening support
-
Improved muscle conditioning
Radiofrequency Fat and Tissue Heating
Controlled radiofrequency energy heats the treatment area while the electromagnetic function stimulates the muscles. This thermal action supports fat-reduction treatments and improves the appearance of skin firmness.
Common applications include:
-
Localized fat-reduction support
-
Abdominal contouring
-
Waistline shaping
-
Thigh and arm treatments
-
Skin-firming programs
-
Smoother-looking body contours
Combined Body-Contouring Technology
The simultaneous use of electromagnetic muscle stimulation and RF energy allows professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin quality during the same treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Muscle building and definition
-
Fat-reduction support
-
Full-body contouring
-
Buttock toning
-
Improved skin firmness
-
Post-weight-loss body shaping
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Muscle-Toning Program
A focused treatment program designed to stimulate muscle contractions and improve the appearance of strength, firmness, and definition.
Recommended applications: Abdomen, buttocks, arms, and thighs.
Recommended for: Clients seeking greater muscle definition and improved body tone without intensive conventional exercise during treatment.
Fat-Reduction Program
A professional protocol that combines electromagnetic stimulation with controlled RF heating to support the reduction of localized fat deposits.
Recommended applications: Abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks.
Recommended for: Clients with stubborn body areas that may not respond sufficiently to diet and exercise alone.
Complete Body-Sculpting Program
A combined protocol developed to support muscle tone, fat reduction, skin firmness, and improved body contours during one structured treatment course.
Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, buttocks and thighs, or other compatible area combinations.
Recommended for: Clients seeking comprehensive body-contouring benefits rather than a single-function treatment.
Maintenance and Conditioning Program
A follow-up program designed to support previously achieved muscle tone and body-contouring results.
Recommended applications: Previously treated areas requiring periodic muscle stimulation or contour maintenance.
Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial 4–6-session course and want occasional maintenance treatments.
Adjustable Electromagnetic and RF Treatment Settings
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| HI-EMT Energy | Adjustable electromagnetic intensity | Allows muscle stimulation to be adapted to the treatment area and client tolerance |
| RF Energy | Adjustable controlled tissue heating | Supports fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators | Enables flexible single-area or multi-area treatment |
| Treatment Time | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Supports efficient professional appointment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Approximately 4–6 sessions | Provides a structured program for progressive results |
| Session Frequency | Approximately two sessions per week | Supports consistent muscle stimulation and body contouring |
| Control Interface | 10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen | Provides convenient treatment selection and adjustment |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports temperature management during professional operation |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V dual compatibility | Enables operation in different international markets |
Energy and RF intensity should begin at a comfortable level and be increased gradually according to the client’s response, treatment area, physical condition, and professional operating protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdomen and waist are common areas for combined muscle-toning and body-contouring treatments.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle stimulation
-
Improved core definition
-
Waistline contouring
-
Localized fat-reduction support
-
Firmer-looking abdominal skin
-
Improved midsection shape
Arms and Upper-Body Areas
Ergonomic applicators can be positioned on compatible upper-body muscle groups to support toning and definition.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Biceps and triceps stimulation
-
Improved muscle definition
-
Localized contouring
-
Firmer-looking skin
Buttocks and Thigh Areas
The machine supports lower-body programs developed to stimulate the gluteal and thigh muscles while improving body contours.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock toning and firming
-
Gluteal muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh contouring
-
Improved lower-body definition
-
Localized fat-reduction support
-
More balanced body proportions
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Application | Primary Area | Professional Objective |
|---|---|---|
| Abdominal Muscle Toning | Abdomen | Stimulate abdominal muscles and improve definition |
| Waistline Contouring | Waist and sides | Support a slimmer and more balanced waistline |
| Buttock Toning | Buttocks | Stimulate gluteal muscles and improve firmness |
| Thigh Sculpting | Inner and outer thighs | Improve muscle tone and lower-body contours |
| Arm Definition | Upper arms | Support biceps and triceps conditioning |
| Localized Fat Reduction | Compatible body areas | Support the reduction of stubborn fat deposits |
| Skin-Firming Treatment | Abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks | Improve the appearance of skin firmness |
| Muscle Conditioning | Selected muscle groups | Support strength, tone, and muscle activation |
| Post-Weight-Loss Contouring | Abdomen, thighs, arms, and buttocks | Improve body shape and muscle definition |
| Maintenance Treatment | Previously treated areas | Help maintain muscle tone and contouring results |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s goals, medical history, physical condition, previous treatments, and possible contraindications.
Step 2: Body and Muscle Assessment
Identify the treatment area, evaluate muscle condition, and determine the appropriate applicator placement and treatment program.
Step 3: Applicator Placement
Position and secure the treatment applicators over the selected muscle groups according to the professional operating protocol.
Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the treatment time, electromagnetic intensity, and RF level through the intelligent touchscreen. Begin at a comfortable setting and increase the intensity gradually. A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes.
Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated area, and provide suitable hydration, exercise, nutrition, and maintenance recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine combines professional HI-EMT and RF technology with four applicators and an intelligent control system.
Key advantages include:
-
Combined muscle stimulation and RF technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment applicators
-
Muscle toning and fat-reduction support
-
Multiple body-treatment applications
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Structured 4–6-session treatment courses
-
10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air and water circulation cooling
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
Professional training and after-sales support
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine |
| Technology | High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology and Radiofrequency |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Primary Functions | Fat reduction, muscle building, muscle toning, skin firming, and body contouring |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Approximately 4–6 sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Approximately two sessions per week |
| Muscle Contractions | Claimed equivalent of up to 30,000 crunches or squats per session |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display and Controls | 10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V dual compatibility |
| Certificates | CE and ISO |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| After-Sales Service | Professional training and technical support |
The stated muscle-contraction equivalent is a product-performance comparison and should not be interpreted as an exact substitute for conventional exercise. Treatment experiences and outcomes vary according to body composition, muscle condition, lifestyle, settings, treatment frequency, and adherence to the recommended course.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine
-
4 × Ergonomic treatment applicators
-
Compatible applicator straps
-
Standard handle connections
-
1 × Compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
1 × Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Machine setup guide
-
Applicator-placement instructions
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Safety and contraindication information
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Professional operating training
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional training and technical guidance to help machine owners and treatment providers operate the EMSlim system safely and confidently.
Training and support cover:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Applicator positioning
-
HI-EMT energy adjustment
-
RF setting adjustment
-
Treatment-area selection
-
Client consultation procedures
-
Contraindication screening
-
Treatment-course planning
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
-
After-sales technical assistance
Ongoing support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising during normal professional operation. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair assistance are provided.
Warranty support includes:
-
Remote technical diagnosis
-
Operating and troubleshooting guidance
-
Support for eligible replacement parts
-
Repair instructions
-
Maintenance recommendations
-
After-sales communication during the warranty period
Technical Support Process
-
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information.
-
Provide a detailed explanation of the technical issue.
-
Submit clear photos or a short video when requested.
-
Allow the technical team to diagnose the problem.
-
Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions.
-
Receive eligible replacement-part support when required.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by:
-
Incorrect machine operation
-
Unauthorized modification or repair
-
Accidental impact or physical damage
-
Improper voltage or electrical installation
-
Operation without the required cooling conditions
-
Water damage or unsuitable storage
-
Failure to follow maintenance instructions
-
Normal wear of straps, cables, connectors, and other consumable components
-
Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery
Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. The system should only be operated by trained professionals following the supplied instructions and applicable local regulations.
Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment
-
Severe liver or kidney conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled diabetes
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds or damaged skin
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Severe muscle injuries
-
Abdominal or inguinal hernia
-
Reduced sensation in the treatment area
-
Any medical condition requiring professional clearance
Clients with medical conditions or implanted devices should consult a qualified healthcare professional before receiving treatment.
Operating Precautions
-
Complete a consultation before every initial treatment.
-
Inspect the machine, cables, applicators, and cooling system before operation.
-
Position applicators over suitable muscle groups only.
-
Secure each applicator correctly before beginning treatment.
-
Start with a low electromagnetic intensity.
-
Increase energy gradually according to client tolerance.
-
Monitor RF warmth and client comfort throughout the session.
-
Do not place applicators over the head, chest, heart, or injured tissue.
-
Stop treatment if the client experiences pain, dizziness, abnormal discomfort, or skin irritation.
-
Do not exceed the recommended session duration.
-
Maintain sufficient spacing between sessions.
-
Clean and disinfect applicators after every client.
-
Follow the required cooling and maintenance procedures.
-
Use a stable and correctly grounded power source.
-
Maintain appropriate client-treatment records.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine is suitable for:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Beauty salons
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Medical spas where locally permitted
-
Wellness facilities
-
Gyms and fitness studios
-
Slimming centers
-
Professional muscle-toning providers
-
Entrepreneurs entering the aesthetic-equipment market
Users should complete appropriate operating training and comply with local requirements governing electromagnetic, radiofrequency, and body-contouring treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine?
1. Combined HI-EMT and RF Technology
The machine combines powerful muscle stimulation with controlled RF heating, allowing professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin firmness within one treatment program.
2. Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four treatment applicators provide flexible positioning and support efficient single-area or multi-area protocols.
3. Multiple Body Applications
The system supports professional treatments for the abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks.
4. Intelligent Professional Operation
A 10–12-inch touchscreen, adjustable settings, and air-and-water cooling support convenient use in busy professional environments.
5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates, professional training, ongoing technical assistance, and a three-year warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine work?
The system combines high-intensity electromagnetic muscle stimulation with radiofrequency energy. HI-EMT stimulates powerful muscle contractions while RF heats the surrounding tissue to support fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments.
Q: What is the difference between HI-EMT and RF?
HI-EMT primarily stimulates muscle contractions, while radiofrequency delivers controlled thermal energy to the tissue. Combining them supports muscle toning, body contouring, and skin-firming objectives.
Q: What results can the machine support?
The machine supports improved muscle tone, greater body definition, localized fat reduction, firmer-looking skin, and more balanced body contours.
Q: Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system works externally and does not require needles, incisions, anesthesia, or surgical procedures.
Q: Is the treatment painful?
Clients generally feel strong muscle contractions and controlled warmth. Comfort varies, so intensity should be adjusted gradually and monitored throughout the treatment.
Q: How long does one treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes.
Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A starting course generally includes approximately 4–6 sessions, with around two sessions per week when suitable.
Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice improved muscle activation or firmness after several sessions. More developed changes generally appear progressively during and after the treatment course. Individual outcomes vary.
Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible treatment areas include the abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks.
Q: Can multiple areas be treated?
The machine includes four applicators, allowing professionals to create flexible treatment configurations according to the selected protocol and machine controls.
Q: Does the machine replace exercise?
EMSlim should complement, not replace, regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, and a healthy lifestyle.
Q: Is there any downtime?
Most suitable clients can return to their normal activities after a session. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to post-exercise sensations may occur.
Q: Can the machine help build muscle?
HI-EMT technology stimulates repeated muscle contractions and can support improved muscle tone and conditioning through a structured treatment course.
Q: Can it reduce fat?
The combined HI-EMT and RF treatment supports localized fat-reduction programs. Outcomes depend on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment settings, and completed course.
Q: Does it tighten the skin?
Controlled RF energy can support collagen-related skin-firming treatments and improve the appearance of skin texture.
Q: Is the treatment suitable for everyone?
Every client must complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment.
Q: Can clients with metal implants receive treatment?
Clients with metal implants in or near the treatment area should not receive treatment without clearance from a qualified healthcare professional.
Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility.
Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates.
Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Training includes machine setup, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cleaning, and maintenance guidance.
Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support.
Add Professional EMSlim Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine provides clinics, salons, wellness centers, and fitness businesses with a professional solution for muscle toning, fat-reduction support, body contouring, and skin firming.
Five key benefits:
-
Combined HI-EMT and radiofrequency technology
-
Four ergonomic applicators
-
Efficient 20–30-minute treatment sessions
-
Multiple body-treatment applications
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support.
Receives in 8 days.
Buy 2+ machines and save up to 15% — get a personalized quote within 24 hours.
From $1,799.00
Professional Configurable HI-EMT Body-Sculpting System
Flexible Two- or Four-Handle Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Device is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology produces approximately 20,000–30,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute session. Depending on the selected model, the system can include two or four ergonomic treatment applicators.
With adjustable energy settings, an intelligent digital touchscreen, air-and-water circulation cooling, and flexible single-area or multi-area operation, the system is suitable for slimming clinics, fitness centers, physiotherapy facilities, wellness centers, and beauty salons.
HI-EMT technology | Two- or four-handle options | Flexible treatment configuration | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing powerful involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Professional fitness treatments
Flexible Body-Contouring Programs
The selected two- or four-handle configuration supports focused, bilateral, sequential, or multi-area applicator placement.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and waist treatments
-
Buttock and thigh programs
-
Upper-arm conditioning
-
Bilateral muscle stimulation
-
Single-area focused treatment
-
Customized multi-area programs
Adjustable Muscle-Conditioning Programs
Energy intensity can be customized according to the selected body area, client comfort, and treatment objective.
Common benefits include:
-
Progressive muscle activation
-
Personalized treatment intensity
-
Focused body-area treatments
-
Bilateral treatment capability
-
Structured treatment courses
-
Maintenance-session planning
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses suitable applicator placement to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Midsection definition
-
Waistline sculpting
-
General abdominal programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions the applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for focused or bilateral lower-body treatment.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving lower-body programs
Upper-Body and Multi-Area Program
Uses the available applicators for customized upper- and lower-body treatment combinations.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Abdomen and arm treatments
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Customized multi-area body sculpting
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved arm definition
-
Clients with multiple body-conditioning objectives
-
Clients receiving four-handle treatment programs
Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial EMSlim course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-tone maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Fitness-program support
-
Seasonal body-sculpting treatments
Recommended for:
-
Returning EMSlim clients
-
Clients completing four to six initial sessions
-
Clients combining treatment with regular exercise
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Device allows practitioners to customize treatment according to the model configuration, selected body areas, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | HI-EMT | Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Treatment Handles | Two or four, model-dependent | Focused, bilateral, or multi-area treatments |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000–30,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Four to six sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized client comfort |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous professional operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
The applicators can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved abdominal tone
-
Multi-zone midsection treatment
Buttocks and Thighs
The available applicators support focused or bilateral treatments across suitable lower-body muscle groups.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body body sculpting
Arms and Multiple Body Areas
The configurable applicator system allows professionals to create customized upper- and lower-body treatment combinations.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Arm and abdomen treatments
-
Thigh and buttock treatments
-
Customized multi-area programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Focused or bilateral placement |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Targeted or combined placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral placement |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Sequential or bilateral treatment |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh definition and muscle stimulation | Sequential or bilateral treatment |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Focused or bilateral treatment |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Four-handle model |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment areas and position the available applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. Correct placement is essential for balanced muscle stimulation.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with conservative energy settings. Adjust the intensity according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response.
Step 4: HI-EMT Treatment
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Device combines configurable HI-EMT performance with professional controls and continuous-operation cooling.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional HI-EMT technology
-
Choice of two or four treatment handles
-
Approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session
-
Focused, bilateral, and multi-area configurations
-
Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
Intelligent digital touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Four- to six-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSlim Device |
| Technology | High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology |
| Treatment Handles | Two or four ergonomic applicators, model-dependent |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000–30,000 |
| Primary Functions | Muscle conditioning and body contouring |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, sequential, bilateral, or multi-area |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Four to six sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Results Timeline | Progressive changes during and after the treatment course |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display | Intelligent digital touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim main unit
-
2 or 4 × Ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
Intelligent digital touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
The selected two- or four-handle configuration should be confirmed when placing the order.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Multi-area treatment guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty EMSlim Device includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Two- and four-handle configurations
-
Bilateral and multi-area treatments
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Device includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with conservative energy levels.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment areas, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Device is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Slimming clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Aesthetic salons
-
Medical spas
-
Fitness centers
-
Gyms
-
Wellness facilities
-
Physiotherapy and recovery centers
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HI-EMT treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSlim Device?
Configurable HI-EMT Technology
Businesses can select a two- or four-handle model according to their treatment services, client volume, and operational requirements.
Flexible Applicator Options
The available configurations support focused, bilateral, sequential, and multi-area treatment programs.
Multiple Body Areas
One system supports professional programs for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The intelligent digital touchscreen and air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator-placement guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty EMSlim Device?
It is a professional HI-EMT system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation, body conditioning, and body-contouring treatments.
How does HI-EMT technology work?
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions during treatment.
How many applicators are included?
The machine is available with two or four ergonomic applicators, depending on the selected model.
Which configuration should I choose?
A two-handle model is suitable for focused or bilateral treatments. A four-handle model provides greater flexibility for multi-area treatment programs.
Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur.
Can HI-EMT replace regular exercise?
HI-EMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course.
How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator placement, model configuration, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, cooling-system maintenance, safety, and troubleshooting.
Add Configurable HI-EMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Device enables slimming clinics, fitness facilities, wellness centers, and aesthetic professionals to select a professional configuration suited to focused or multi-area muscle-conditioning treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
-
Flexible two- or four-handle configurations
-
Approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for model selection, product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,599.00
Professional Four-Handle HI-EMT Body-Sculpting System
Multi-Area Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine is a professional body-sculpting system developed for simultaneous muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology produces repeated supramaximal muscle contractions without requiring voluntary exercise during treatment. The four-handle configuration supports simultaneous or independent placement across the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
With approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session, adjustable energy settings, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, and combined air-and-water cooling, the system is designed for premium clinics, medical spas, body-sculpting studios, fitness centers, and wellness facilities.
HI-EMT technology | Four ergonomic handles | Multi-area treatments | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing powerful involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Professional fitness treatments
Simultaneous Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy, treatment objectives, and selected protocol.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Arms and abdomen treatments
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Bilateral muscle stimulation
-
Customized multi-area programs
Adjustable Muscle-Conditioning Programs
Energy intensity can be customized for each selected body area according to client comfort and treatment objectives.
Common benefits include:
-
Progressive muscle activation
-
Personalized treatment intensity
-
Simultaneous multi-area treatment
-
Bilateral treatment capability
-
Structured treatment courses
-
Maintenance-session planning
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses suitable applicator placement to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Midsection definition
-
Waistline sculpting
-
General abdominal programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock-Toning Program
Positions two or more applicators over suitable buttock and lower-body muscle areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Toning and firmness support
-
Bilateral buttock treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs
Thigh and Arm Program
Uses the four applicators for bilateral or simultaneous treatments across suitable thigh and arm areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Bilateral leg treatments
-
Arm and thigh definition
-
Multi-area body sculpting
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved arm or thigh tone
-
Clients interested in upper- and lower-body conditioning
-
Fitness and body-contouring clients
Multi-Area Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatments after completion of the client’s initial EMSlim course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-tone maintenance
-
Multi-area body-contour maintenance
-
Fitness-program support
-
Seasonal body-sculpting treatments
Recommended for:
-
Returning EMSlim clients
-
Clients completing four to six initial sessions
-
Clients combining treatment with regular exercise
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatments according to the selected body areas, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | HI-EMT | Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Treatment Handles | Four | Simultaneous, focused, or bilateral treatments |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000–30,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient multi-area treatment |
| Treatment Course | Four to six sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized client comfort |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous professional operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
Multiple handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved abdominal tone
-
Multi-zone midsection treatment
Buttocks and Thighs
The applicators support balanced lower-body treatments across suitable buttock and thigh muscle groups.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body body sculpting
Arms and Multiple Body Areas
Four handles allow professionals to create customized upper- and lower-body treatment combinations.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Simultaneous arm and abdomen treatment
-
Simultaneous thigh and buttock treatment
-
Customized four-area programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Two or more handles |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Targeted or combined placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral handle placement |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Bilateral treatment |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh definition and muscle stimulation | Bilateral treatment |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Bilateral treatment |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Up to four handles |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment areas and position the applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. Correct placement is essential for balanced muscle stimulation.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with conservative energy levels. Adjust each applicable treatment setting according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response.
Step 4: HI-EMT Treatment
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine combines multi-area HI-EMT performance with professional controls and continuous-operation cooling.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional HI-EMT technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment handles
-
Approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session
-
Simultaneous multi-area capability
-
Focused and bilateral treatment configurations
-
Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Four- to six-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine |
| Technology | High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000–30,000 |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, simultaneous, or bilateral |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Four to six sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim main unit
-
4 × Ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Multi-area treatment guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Simultaneous and bilateral configurations
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Multi-area treatment planning
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with conservative energy levels.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment areas, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Premium body-sculpting clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Aesthetic salons
-
Fitness centers
-
Gyms
-
Wellness facilities
-
Slimming centers
-
Physiotherapy and recovery centers
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HI-EMT treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine?
Multi-Area HI-EMT Technology
Four applicators support simultaneous electromagnetic muscle stimulation across multiple suitable body areas.
Four Ergonomic Applicators
The four-handle configuration supports focused, bilateral, and multi-area treatment programs.
Professional Cooling System
Combined air-and-water circulation helps maintain stable performance during continuous professional operation.
Advanced Touchscreen Control
The 12-inch intelligent touchscreen and adjustable settings support efficient multi-area treatment management.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator-placement guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional HI-EMT system developed for simultaneous electromagnetic muscle stimulation, body conditioning, and multi-area contouring programs.
How does HI-EMT technology work?
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions during the treatment session.
How many applicators are included?
The package includes four ergonomic HI-EMT treatment handles.
Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
Can all four handles be used simultaneously?
Yes. The four-handle configuration supports suitable simultaneous, bilateral, or multi-area treatments according to the selected protocol.
How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced following exercise may occur.
Can HI-EMT replace regular exercise?
HI-EMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively throughout and after the treatment course.
What results are listed for this system?
The supplied product information lists potential muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These are not guaranteed results, and individual outcomes vary.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, multi-handle placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, cooling-system maintenance, safety, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional Multi-Area HI-EMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim Machine enables body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, fitness centers, and aesthetic professionals to provide simultaneous muscle-conditioning and multi-area body-contouring treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
-
Four ergonomic handles for simultaneous multi-area treatments
-
Approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session
-
A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$3,999.00
Professional Four-Handle NEO EMShape Body-Sculpting System
Straight and Curved Electromagnetic Applicators for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple body areas.
The machine combines advanced EMShape technology with four ergonomic applicators: two straight handles for conventional placement and two curved handles designed for improved contact across contoured body areas.
With approximately 20,000 muscle contractions per session, adjustable treatment settings, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, air-and-water cooling, and a professional vertical design, the system is suitable for body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, slimming centers, fitness facilities, and wellness studios.
EMShape technology | Two straight and two curved handles | Vertical tower design | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
EMShape Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
EMShape technology delivers high-intensity electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Calf muscle stimulation
Straight and Curved Applicator Treatment
The system includes two straight and two curved applicators for different body shapes and placement requirements.
Common benefits include:
-
Conventional straight-handle placement
-
Improved contact on contoured body areas
-
Focused muscle stimulation
-
Bilateral treatment capability
-
Multi-area treatment flexibility
-
Customized applicator positioning
Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Arms and abdomen
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and love-handle areas
-
Bilateral calf treatments
-
Customized multi-area programs
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal and Waistline Program
Uses suitable straight or curved applicators to stimulate abdominal muscles and support midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Waistline sculpting
-
Love-handle-area programs
-
General midsection definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for lower-body treatment.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs
Arm and Calf Program
Uses suitable applicators for upper-arm and calf muscle-conditioning treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Biceps and triceps conditioning
-
Calf muscle stimulation
-
Bilateral limb treatments
-
Improved-looking muscle definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved arm or calf tone
-
Fitness and body-contouring clients
-
Clients requiring smaller-area applicator placement
Multi-Area Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial NEO EMSlim course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-tone maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Multi-area conditioning
-
Fitness-program support
-
Seasonal body-sculpting treatments
Recommended for:
-
Returning NEO EMSlim clients
-
Clients completing six to eight initial sessions
-
Clients combining treatment with regular exercise
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatments according to applicator type, body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | EMShape electromagnetic stimulation | Muscle-conditioning treatments |
| Treatment Handles | Four | Multi-area treatment capability |
| Straight Handles | Two | Conventional and precise placement |
| Curved Handles | Two | Contoured and ergonomic placement |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Six to eight sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized client comfort |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
Straight or curved handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Love-handle-area treatment
-
Multi-zone midsection sculpting
Buttocks and Thighs
Curved and straight applicators support customized placement across suitable lower-body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatment
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body sculpting
Arms and Calves
The applicator selection supports suitable upper-arm and lower-leg treatment programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Calf muscle conditioning
-
Bilateral limb treatment
-
Customized smaller-area programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Applicator Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Straight or curved handles |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Curved-handle placement |
| Love Handles | Side-body conditioning | Curved-handle placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral curved or straight handles |
| Inner and Outer Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Suitable bilateral placement |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Straight handles |
| Calves | Lower-leg muscle conditioning | Suitable straight or curved handles |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Up to four handles |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Selection and Placement
Select straight or curved handles according to the treatment area and client anatomy. Position and secure the applicators over suitable muscle groups.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate program and begin with conservative energy settings. Adjust the intensity according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response.
Step 4: EMShape Treatment
The system delivers electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine combines EMShape technology with straight and curved applicator options.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional EMShape technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment handles
-
Two straight applicators
-
Two curved applicators
-
Approximately 20,000 contractions per session
-
Focused, bilateral, and multi-area configurations
-
Treatments for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, and calves
-
Vertical professional design
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Six- to eight-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine |
| Technology | HI-EMT with EMShape technology |
| Design | Vertical tower |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Straight Handles | Two |
| Curved Handles | Two |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000 |
| Primary Functions | Muscle conditioning and body contouring |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 30% increased muscle definition and 20% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, bilateral, or multi-area |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Six to eight sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim main unit
-
2 × Straight EMShape treatment applicators
-
2 × Curved EMShape treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Straight-handle placement guidance
-
Curved-handle placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Calf-treatment protocols
-
Multi-area treatment guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Straight-handle placement
-
Curved-handle placement
-
Applicator selection by body area
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Calf-treatment protocols
-
Multi-area treatment planning
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Select the correct straight or curved applicator.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with conservative energy levels.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record applicator type, treatment area, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Premium body-sculpting clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Slimming centers
-
Aesthetic salons
-
Fitness facilities
-
Gyms
-
Wellness centers
-
Professional body-contouring studios
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering EMShape or HI-EMT treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine?
Straight and Curved Applicators
Two straight and two curved handles support customized placement across different body shapes and treatment areas.
Professional EMShape Technology
The system provides approximately 20,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session.
Multiple Treatment Areas
One machine supports customized programs for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, straight- and curved-handle guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional electromagnetic body-sculpting system with two straight and two curved applicators.
What is EMShape technology?
EMShape is the supplied electromagnetic muscle-stimulation technology used by this system to produce repeated involuntary muscle contractions.
What is different about the curved handles?
The curved applicators are designed to improve placement and contact across suitable contoured body areas. Correct selection depends on the client’s anatomy and treatment area.
Do curved handles guarantee deeper muscle engagement?
No. Treatment depth and response depend on electromagnetic output, applicator position, client anatomy, settings, and individual response.
How many applicators are included?
The package includes four handles: two straight applicators and two curved applicators.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves.
Can all four handles be used simultaneously?
The four-handle system supports suitable multi-area operation according to the selected protocol and machine configuration.
How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends six to eight sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur.
Can EMShape replace regular exercise?
EMShape treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course.
What performance figures are supplied?
Muscle-definition improvement of up to 30% and fat reduction of up to 20%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes.
How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, applicator selection, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, straight- and curved-handle placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Curved-Handle EMShape Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine enables body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, and wellness professionals to provide customized electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments using straight and curved applicators.
Five key benefits:
-
Professional EMShape electromagnetic technology
-
Two straight and two curved ergonomic applicators
-
Approximately 20,000 contractions per session
-
A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,699.00
Professional Pelvic Floor Strengthening System
Non-Invasive HIFEM Technology for Pelvic Wellness and Bladder-Control Programs
The Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is a professional HIFEM system developed for pelvic floor strengthening, postpartum wellness, bladder-control support, and intimate wellness programs.
High-intensity focused electromagnetic energy stimulates deep pelvic floor muscles and produces approximately 12,000 muscle contractions during a 28–30-minute session. Clients remain comfortably seated and fully clothed throughout the treatment.
With adjustable power, customizable frequency settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and pre-programmed protocols, the system enables professionals to personalize every session according to the client’s comfort level and treatment objectives.
12,000 contractions per session | 28–30-minute treatment | Fully clothed | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Advanced HIFEM Technology on One Professional Platform
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
The system generates focused electromagnetic energy that penetrates the pelvic floor area and stimulates powerful involuntary muscle contractions. These contractions engage muscles more intensively and consistently than conventional voluntary exercises.
Common applications include:
-
Pelvic floor muscle strengthening
-
Bladder-control support
-
Postpartum wellness programs
-
Intimate wellness treatments
-
Core stability support
-
Age-related pelvic muscle conditioning
Supramaximal Muscle Contractions
Each session produces approximately 12,000 supramaximal contractions. The client does not need to perform manual exercises, allowing the system to provide consistent muscle activation throughout the treatment.
Common benefits include:
-
Consistent pelvic muscle engagement
-
Improved muscle strength and endurance
-
Convenient treatment without manual exercise
-
Personalized intensity according to client comfort
-
Structured treatment programs with repeatable settings
Fully Clothed, Non-Invasive Treatment
Clients remain seated and fully clothed during the entire session. No applicators are inserted into the body, and the procedure requires no injections, incisions, anesthesia, or complicated preparation.
This discreet treatment experience is suitable for professional environments where client privacy, comfort, and convenience are essential.
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Postpartum Wellness Program
Designed to support pelvic floor conditioning following pregnancy and childbirth, subject to professional assessment and appropriate medical clearance.
Recommended applications:
-
Postpartum pelvic muscle weakness
-
Reduced pelvic floor tone
-
Bladder leakage concerns
-
Core stability support
Recommended for:
-
Postpartum clients
-
Women seeking non-invasive pelvic wellness support
-
Clients who find manual pelvic floor exercises difficult
Bladder-Control Support Program
Provides targeted pelvic floor muscle stimulation for clients experiencing weakness associated with bladder-control concerns.
Recommended applications:
-
Stress-related urinary leakage
-
Leakage during coughing or sneezing
-
Leakage during physical activity
-
Reduced bladder-support muscle strength
Recommended for:
-
Women and men with pelvic floor weakness
-
Mature clients
-
Clients seeking a non-surgical support program
Intimate Wellness Program
Focuses on improving pelvic muscle tone, awareness, endurance, and control as part of a professional intimate wellness service.
Recommended applications:
-
Reduced pelvic muscle tone
-
Pelvic floor conditioning
-
Intimate wellness support
-
Confidence and body-awareness programs
Recommended for:
-
Women’s wellness centers
-
Intimate wellness clinics
-
Clients seeking discreet, non-invasive treatment
Pelvic Strength and Maintenance Program
Created for clients who want ongoing pelvic floor conditioning after completing an initial treatment course.
Recommended applications:
-
Pelvic muscle maintenance
-
Core foundation support
-
Age-related muscle conditioning
-
Long-term wellness programs
Recommended for:
-
Existing pelvic floor clients
-
Mature women and men
-
Clients completing a structured treatment course
Customizable Power and Frequency Settings
The system allows professionals to adjust treatment intensity according to the client’s needs, tolerance, and program objectives.
| Setting | Available Range | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Power Output | 300W–5000W | Adjustable treatment intensity |
| Frequency Range | 3–200Hz | Customizable muscle-stimulation patterns |
| Session Duration | 28–30 minutes | Efficient professional treatment |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Structured pelvic wellness programs |
| Treatment Position | Seated and fully clothed | Discreet, convenient client experience |
| Control System | Intelligent touchscreen | Protocol and intensity management |
Treatment settings and session frequency should always be selected following professional consultation and client screening.
Professional Pelvic Wellness Applications
| Treatment Category | Primary Objective | Suitable Clients |
|---|---|---|
| Postpartum Wellness | Support pelvic floor muscle recovery and conditioning | Postpartum clients with appropriate clearance |
| Bladder-Control Support | Strengthen muscles associated with bladder support | Women and men with pelvic floor weakness |
| Intimate Wellness | Improve pelvic muscle tone, control, and awareness | Adult wellness clients |
| Menopause Support | Support pelvic muscle conditioning during age-related changes | Menopausal and postmenopausal clients |
| Core Stability | Strengthen the pelvic foundation supporting the core | Clients seeking posture and stability support |
| Maintenance Programs | Help maintain pelvic muscle strength after a treatment course | Returning wellness clients |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, pelvic wellness concerns, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Determine whether professional or medical clearance is required.
Step 2: Comfortable Positioning
The client sits comfortably in the treatment chair while remaining fully clothed. Correct seating alignment helps position the pelvic floor area over the electromagnetic treatment zone.
Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select the appropriate program, power level, frequency, and treatment duration. Begin at a comfortable intensity and adjust progressively according to the client’s response.
Step 4: HIFEM Treatment
The system generates repeated electromagnetic pulses for approximately 28–30 minutes. The client experiences strong, rhythmic pelvic muscle contractions while remaining comfortably seated.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
The system completes the selected program automatically. The client can leave the treatment area immediately unless the practitioner provides individual aftercare recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair combines professional performance with a discreet, comfortable client experience.
Key advantages include:
-
Approximately 12,000 contractions per session
-
Fully clothed and non-invasive treatment
-
Adjustable 300W–5000W power output
-
Customizable 3–200Hz frequency range
-
Intelligent digital touchscreen
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Automatic shut-off and intensity controls
-
Multiple professional color options
-
Universal 110V–240V power compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing technical support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair |
| Technology | HIFEM High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology |
| Primary Application | Pelvic floor strengthening and intimate wellness |
| Power Output | 300W–5000W adjustable |
| Frequency Range | 3–200Hz |
| Session Duration | Approximately 28–30 minutes |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 12,000 |
| Treatment Position | Seated and fully clothed |
| Control System | Intelligent digital touchscreen |
| Treatment Programs | Pre-programmed and customizable protocols |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, temperature control, and intensity limits |
| Available Colors | Orange, pink, blue, and white |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair
-
1 × Integrated intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Adjustable power and frequency controls
-
1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable
-
Selected professional chair color
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Operating and safety guid
-
Standard treatment protocol templates
-
Postpartum wellness protocol guidance
-
Bladder-control support protocol guidance
-
Intimate wellness protocol guidance
-
Client consultation and education materials
-
Service-menu and treatment-package guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair includes professional operating guidance to help your team use the system confidently and responsibly.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen and program operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Correct client positioning
-
Power and frequency adjustment
-
Treatment protocol selection
-
Safety procedures and contraindications
-
Machine cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
-
Service planning and client communication
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and share photographs or video when required.
-
A technician will assess the machine remotely.
-
Operating guidance or replacement parts will be arranged when applicable.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before treatment. This system must be operated according to the supplied manual and applicable local requirements.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Unexplained pelvic pain or bleeding
-
Epilepsy or conditions affected by electromagnetic stimulation
-
Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with medical concerns should consult an appropriate healthcare professional before beginning a pelvic floor treatment program.
Intended Professional Users
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Women’s wellness centers
-
Gynecology and pelvic wellness practices
-
Medical spas
-
Physiotherapy and rehabilitation centers
-
Postpartum wellness centers
-
Intimate wellness clinics
-
Professional beauty and wellness facilities
Local licensing and operating requirements should be reviewed before offering treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair?
Approximately 12,000 Contractions per Session
Advanced HIFEM technology provides intensive pelvic floor muscle stimulation during a convenient 28–30-minute session.
Discreet Client Experience
Clients remain fully clothed and comfortably seated, creating a private and convenient treatment experience without invasive applicators.
Personalized Professional Programs
Adjustable power, frequency, and protocol settings allow practitioners to tailor sessions according to client comfort and treatment objectives.
Multiple Wellness Applications
One system supports postpartum wellness, bladder-control programs, intimate wellness, core conditioning, and pelvic floor maintenance services.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes training, operating documentation, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair?
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is a professional HIFEM system that uses focused electromagnetic energy to stimulate repeated pelvic floor muscle contractions while the client remains comfortably seated.
How long does one session take?
A standard session takes approximately 28–30 minutes, depending on the selected protocol and the client’s individual treatment plan.
Does the client remain fully clothed?
Yes. Clients can remain fully clothed throughout the session. Lightweight clothing that does not contain metal is generally the most appropriate.
How many contractions occur during one session?
The system is designed to generate approximately 12,000 pelvic floor muscle contractions during a complete session.
Is the treatment invasive?
No. The treatment does not require surgery, injections, internal applicators, or anesthesia.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients typically experience strong, rhythmic pelvic muscle contractions. Intensity can be adjusted progressively to maintain an appropriate comfort level.
How many sessions are recommended?
The source protocol recommends two sessions per week over an 8–12-week program. The final schedule should be personalized following professional consultation.
When may clients notice changes?
Individual experiences vary. Some clients may notice increased pelvic muscle awareness during the early stages of a program, while strength and functional changes generally require a consistent series of sessions.
Can the chair be used for postpartum clients?
It can be incorporated into postpartum wellness programs after an appropriate professional assessment and medical clearance when necessary.
Is the system suitable for men?
The technology may also support pelvic floor conditioning programs for suitable male clients, subject to professional screening and an appropriate treatment plan.
Does the machine have adjustable intensity?
Yes. The power output and frequency can be adjusted according to the selected protocol, treatment objective, and client comfort.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Operating guidance, safety training, treatment protocol instruction, and ongoing technical support are included.
Add Professional Pelvic Wellness to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair enables clinics and wellness centers to introduce a discreet, non-invasive pelvic floor service supported by advanced HIFEM technology.
Five key benefits:
-
Approximately 12,000 contractions in a 28–30-minute session
-
Fully clothed and non-invasive client experience
-
Adjustable power, frequency, and treatment protocols
-
Multiple pelvic wellness applications on one platform
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
From $2,399.00
Professional Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine
Dual-Technology Muscle Building, Fat Reduction, and Skin-Firming System
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine is a professional body-contouring system that combines high-intensity focused electromagnetic technology with radiofrequency energy.
HI-EMT energy stimulates powerful supramaximal muscle contractions, while controlled RF heating supports fat metabolism, collagen production, and firmer-looking skin. This combination enables professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin quality within one treatment program.
The system includes four ergonomic applicators with straight and curved options, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, adjustable energy levels, and air-and-water circulation cooling. It is designed for slimming clinics, aesthetic centers, gyms, wellness facilities, physiotherapy centers where locally permitted, and professional body-contouring businesses.
HI-EMT and Radiofrequency | Four Ergonomic Applicators | Dual-Client Capability | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform
HI-EMT Muscle Stimulation
High-intensity focused electromagnetic energy stimulates repeated supramaximal muscle contractions that cannot normally be maintained through voluntary exercise alone.
The supplied product specification states that one 30-minute session can generate approximately 20,000–30,000 muscle contractions. These contractions support muscle activation, conditioning, firmness, and improved definition.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle toning
-
Gluteal muscle stimulation
-
Thigh conditioning
-
Upper-arm definition
-
Core-strengthening support
-
Improved muscle firmness
Radiofrequency Fat and Tissue Heating
Controlled RF energy heats the underlying tissue while the electromagnetic function activates the muscles. This thermal action supports fat metabolism, collagen stimulation, and improved skin firmness.
Common applications include:
-
Localized fat-reduction support
-
Waistline contouring
-
Abdominal shaping
-
Thigh and arm treatments
-
Skin-firming programs
-
Smoother-looking body contours
Four-Applicator Multi-Area Treatment
The system includes four ergonomic applicators with straight and curved options. The different handle shapes help professionals position applicators securely over a variety of body contours and muscle groups.
Depending on the machine configuration and treatment protocol, the applicators can support multi-area treatments or sessions for two suitable clients simultaneously.
Common applications include:
-
Simultaneous treatment of compatible body areas
-
Abdomen and waistline programs
-
Buttock and thigh treatments
-
Arm and abdominal combinations
-
Two-client treatment workflows
-
High-volume professional scheduling
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Muscle-Building and Toning Program
A focused HI-EMT program designed to stimulate powerful muscle contractions and improve the appearance of tone, strength, and definition.
Recommended applications: Abdomen, buttocks, thighs, and upper arms.
Recommended for: Clients seeking stronger-looking muscles, improved definition, and enhanced body tone.
Fat-Reduction and Skin-Firming Program
A combined HI-EMT and RF protocol designed to support localized fat reduction while improving the appearance of skin firmness.
Recommended applications: Abdomen, waistline, thighs, buttocks, and arms.
Recommended for: Clients with localized fat deposits and reduced skin firmness in compatible treatment areas.
Complete Body-Sculpting Program
A dual-technology program that addresses muscle tone, localized fat, skin quality, and body shape within one structured treatment course.
Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, buttocks and thighs, or other compatible treatment combinations.
Recommended for: Clients seeking comprehensive body-contouring benefits instead of a single-function treatment.
Maintenance and Conditioning Program
A follow-up program designed to support previously achieved muscle tone, definition, and body-contouring results.
Recommended applications: Previously treated muscle groups and body areas.
Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial 4–6-session course and want periodic maintenance treatments.
Adjustable Electromagnetic and RF Treatment Settings
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| HI-EMT Intensity | Adjustable electromagnetic energy | Adapts muscle stimulation to the treatment area and client tolerance |
| RF Energy | Adjustable controlled heating | Supports fat metabolism and skin-firming treatments |
| Applicator Configuration | Four ergonomic handles | Enables flexible single-area, multi-area, or dual-client treatment |
| Applicator Shape | Straight and curved options | Supports secure positioning across different body contours |
| Treatment Time | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Allows efficient professional treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Approximately 4–6 sessions | Provides a structured program for progressive body-contouring results |
| Treatment Frequency | Approximately twice per week | Allows recovery time between muscle-stimulation sessions |
| Control Interface | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen | Provides convenient program selection and energy adjustment |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports temperature control during continuous professional operation |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V compatibility | Supports operation in different international markets |
HI-EMT and RF intensity should begin at a comfortable level and be increased gradually according to the client’s physical condition, treatment area, muscle response, skin sensation, and professional protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdominal and waist areas are suitable for combined muscle-stimulation, fat-reduction, and skin-firming programs.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Improved abdominal definition
-
Core-conditioning support
-
Waistline contouring
-
Localized fat-reduction support
-
Firmer-looking abdominal skin
Arms and Upper-Body Areas
Straight or curved applicators can be positioned over compatible upper-body muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Biceps and triceps stimulation
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Improved muscle definition
-
Localized contouring
-
Firmer-looking skin
-
Better upper-body proportions
Buttocks and Thigh Areas
Curved applicators can follow compatible lower-body contours to stimulate the gluteal and thigh muscles.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock lifting and toning
-
Gluteal muscle stimulation
-
Thigh conditioning
-
Inner- and outer-thigh contouring
-
Localized fat-reduction support
-
Improved lower-body definition
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Application | Primary Area | Professional Objective |
|---|---|---|
| Abdominal Muscle Toning | Abdomen | Stimulate the abdominal muscles and improve definition |
| Core Conditioning | Abdomen and core | Support muscle activation and core firmness |
| Waistline Contouring | Waist and sides | Improve the appearance of waistline shape |
| Buttock Toning | Buttocks | Stimulate gluteal muscles and support a firmer appearance |
| Thigh Sculpting | Inner and outer thighs | Improve muscle tone and lower-body contours |
| Arm Definition | Biceps and triceps | Support upper-arm conditioning and definition |
| Localized Fat Reduction | Compatible body areas | Support the reduction of stubborn fat deposits |
| Skin-Firming Treatment | Abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks | Improve the appearance of skin firmness and texture |
| Multi-Area Sculpting | Compatible area combinations | Address more than one body zone within a treatment plan |
| Maintenance Treatment | Previously treated areas | Help maintain muscle tone and body-contouring results |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s body-contouring goals, medical history, physical condition, previous procedures, implanted devices, and possible contraindications.
Step 2: Body and Muscle Assessment
Assess the selected treatment area, identify the target muscle groups, and determine the most appropriate applicator shape and placement.
Step 3: Applicator Placement
Position the straight or curved applicators securely over the selected muscle groups. Confirm that all straps and connections are correctly fitted before starting treatment.
Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the treatment time, HI-EMT intensity, and RF level through the 12-inch touchscreen. Begin at a comfortable setting and increase the energy gradually. A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes.
Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated areas, and provide hydration, stretching, physical activity, nutrition, and maintenance recommendations. Mild temporary muscle soreness may occur.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine combines dual-technology performance, flexible applicator positioning, and intelligent controls for professional body-contouring environments.
Key advantages include:
-
Combined HI-EMT and radiofrequency technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment applicators
-
Straight and curved handle options
-
Multi-area treatment capability
-
Dual-client workflow capability
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Structured 4–6-session treatment courses
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Adjustable treatment intensity
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
Professional training and after-sales support
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine |
| Technology | HI-EMT and radiofrequency heating |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Applicator Options | Straight and curved handles |
| Primary Functions | Muscle building, muscle toning, fat-reduction support, skin firming, and body contouring |
| Muscle Contractions | Approximately 20,000–30,000 supramaximal contractions per 30-minute session |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waistline, thighs, buttocks, and arms |
| Multi-Area Capability | Compatible body areas may be treated simultaneously |
| Dual-Client Capability | Supports two-client treatment workflows when permitted by the machine configuration and protocol |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Approximately 4–6 sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Approximately twice per week with suitable recovery intervals |
| Results Duration | Supplied estimate of 6–12 months with an appropriate lifestyle and maintenance |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display and Controls | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable according to the body area and client tolerance |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V dual compatibility |
| Certificates | CE and ISO |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| After-Sales Service | Professional training and technical support |
The stated contraction count, result timeline, and result duration are supplied product-performance estimates. Individual experiences and outcomes vary according to body composition, physical condition, diet, activity level, treatment settings, treatment frequency, and maintenance.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine
-
4 × Ergonomic treatment applicators
-
Straight and curved applicator options
-
Compatible applicator straps
-
Standard handle connections
-
1 × Compatible power cable
-
Standard operating accessories
-
1 × Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Machine setup guide
-
Touchscreen operating instructions
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
HI-EMT and RF treatment protocols
-
Contraindication and safety guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Professional operator training
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help machine owners and treatment providers use the EMSlim RF system correctly and confidently.
Training and support cover:
-
Machine installation and initial setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Straight and curved applicator selection
-
Correct applicator positioning
-
HI-EMT energy adjustment
-
RF intensity adjustment
-
Multi-area treatment planning
-
Dual-client workflow guidance
-
Client consultation and contraindication screening
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Troubleshooting assistance
-
Treatment-course planning
Ongoing after-sales support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults occurring under normal professional operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair assistance are supplied.
Warranty support includes:
-
Remote technical diagnosis
-
Operating and troubleshooting assistance
-
Support for eligible replacement parts
-
Repair instructions
-
Maintenance recommendations
-
After-sales communication during the warranty period
Technical Support Process
-
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information.
-
Provide a detailed description of the technical issue.
-
Submit clear photographs or a short video when requested.
-
Allow the technical team to diagnose the problem.
-
Follow the provided troubleshooting or repair instructions.
-
Receive eligible replacement-part support when required.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by:
-
Incorrect machine operation
-
Unauthorized modification or repair
-
Accidental impact or physical damage
-
Improper voltage or electrical installation
-
Operation without the required cooling conditions
-
Water damage or unsuitable storage
-
Failure to follow maintenance instructions
-
Normal wear of straps, cables, connectors, and consumable components
-
Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery
Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every initial treatment. The machine should only be operated by trained professionals following the supplied instructions and applicable local regulations.
Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or plans to become pregnant
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment
-
Active muscle injury or severe inflammation
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled diabetes
-
Open wounds or damaged skin
-
Recent surgery in the intended treatment area
-
Abdominal or inguinal hernia
-
Reduced sensation in the treatment area
-
Any medical condition requiring professional clearance
Clients with implanted devices, metal implants, serious medical conditions, or recent surgery should consult a qualified healthcare professional before treatment.
Operating Precautions
-
Complete a detailed health screening before treatment.
-
Assess the client’s physical condition and body-contouring goals.
-
Ensure the client is adequately hydrated.
-
Advise clients to avoid heavy meals shortly before treatment.
-
Remove metal jewelry and accessories from the treatment area.
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and cooling system.
-
Position applicators only over suitable muscle groups.
-
Secure all applicators before activating the system.
-
Begin with a low HI-EMT and RF intensity.
-
Increase energy gradually according to client tolerance.
-
Monitor muscle response, skin warmth, and client comfort continuously.
-
Stop treatment if the client experiences pain, dizziness, or abnormal discomfort.
-
Do not place applicators over the head, heart, chest, or injured tissue.
-
Do not exceed the recommended treatment time.
-
Allow appropriate recovery time between sessions.
-
Clean and disinfect applicators after every client.
-
Follow all cooling-system and maintenance requirements.
-
Keep accurate client and treatment records when required.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine is suitable for:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Beauty salons
-
Slimming clinics
-
Medical spas where locally permitted
-
Wellness centers
-
Gyms and fitness studios
-
Physiotherapy centers where locally permitted
-
Professional muscle-conditioning providers
Operators should complete appropriate training and comply with local requirements governing electromagnetic, radiofrequency, and body-contouring treatments.
Why Choose the Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine?
1. Combined HI-EMT and RF Technology
The system combines powerful muscle stimulation with controlled RF tissue heating, allowing professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin firmness in one treatment program.
2. Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four straight and curved applicators support customized positioning across the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
3. Multi-Area and Dual-Client Capability
The four-handle configuration supports efficient multi-area treatments and can accommodate dual-client workflows when permitted by the machine configuration and treatment protocol.
4. Intelligent Professional Operation
A 12-inch touchscreen, adjustable energy settings, and air-and-water cooling support convenient operation in high-demand professional environments.
5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates, professional training, after-sales technical support, and a three-year warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine work?
The system combines HI-EMT muscle stimulation with radiofrequency heating. HI-EMT generates powerful muscle contractions, while RF energy heats the underlying tissue to support fat metabolism and skin firmness.
Q: What is the difference between EMSlim RF and a standard electromagnetic machine?
A standard electromagnetic system primarily focuses on muscle stimulation. This system adds RF heating to support fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments alongside muscle conditioning.
Q: How many applicators are included?
The machine includes four ergonomic applicators with straight and curved options.
Q: Why are straight and curved applicators provided?
Different applicator shapes help professionals position the handles over various muscle groups and natural body contours.
Q: Can the machine treat two clients simultaneously?
The four-handle configuration can support two-client treatment workflows when permitted by the control configuration, professional protocol, and local operating requirements.
Q: Can multiple body areas be treated during one appointment?
Yes. Compatible body areas may be treated simultaneously when supported by the machine configuration and professional protocol.
Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible treatment areas include the abdomen, waistline, buttocks, thighs, and upper arms.
Q: How long does one session take?
A typical treatment lasts approximately 20–30 minutes.
Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A standard starting course generally includes approximately 4–6 sessions.
Q: How frequently should sessions be scheduled?
Treatments are commonly scheduled approximately twice per week with suitable recovery time between sessions.
Q: How many muscle contractions occur during a session?
The supplied product specification states that a 30-minute session can generate approximately 20,000–30,000 supramaximal muscle contractions.
Q: Is the contraction count equal to completing 20,000–30,000 exercises?
The number is a product-performance comparison describing repeated muscle stimulation. It should not be interpreted as an exact replacement for conventional exercise.
Q: Is the treatment painful?
Clients generally experience strong muscle contractions and warmth from the RF energy. Intensity should be increased gradually and adjusted according to individual comfort.
Q: Is there any downtime?
Most suitable clients can return to normal activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to the feeling after exercise may occur.
Q: When can clients expect results?
Some clients may notice early changes after several sessions. Muscle definition, body contour, and skin firmness may continue developing during the weeks following a completed treatment course.
Q: How long can results last?
The supplied estimate is approximately 6–12 months with an appropriate lifestyle and maintenance plan. Individual result duration varies.
Q: Are maintenance treatments recommended?
Periodic maintenance sessions may help support muscle tone and body-contouring results. Frequency should be determined according to the client’s response and goals.
Q: Does the machine replace exercise?
EMSlim RF treatments should complement regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, hydration, and a healthy lifestyle.
Q: Is the machine suitable for every client?
No. Every client must complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment.
Q: Can clients with metal implants receive treatment?
Clients with metal implants in or near the treatment area should not receive treatment without clearance from a qualified healthcare professional.
Q: What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses air-and-water circulation cooling to support temperature management during professional operation.
Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility.
Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates.
Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Training includes machine setup, touchscreen operation, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cleaning, and maintenance.
Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support.
Add EMSlim RF Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine gives clinics, salons, gyms, wellness centers, and body-contouring professionals a versatile solution for muscle building, fat-reduction support, skin firming, and multi-area body sculpting.
Five key benefits:
-
Combined HI-EMT and radiofrequency technology
-
Four ergonomic straight and curved applicators
-
Multi-area and dual-client treatment capability
-
Intelligent 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support.
Receives in 8 days.
From $2,499.00
Professional Muscle Sculpting and Body-Contouring System
Dual-Action Technology for Muscle Stimulation and Targeted Fat Reduction
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to combine intensive muscle stimulation with targeted fat-reduction treatments.
Advanced electrical muscle stimulation produces powerful involuntary muscle contractions, helping practitioners deliver muscle-conditioning and body-definition programs. Its integrated RF/energy technology simultaneously targets areas of localized fat, supporting a more toned and sculpted appearance.
With four specialized treatment applicators, adjustable frequency settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and pre-programmed protocols, the EMSZero provides customizable treatments for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves.
2-in-1 muscle and fat treatment | Four applicators | 6000W power | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies on One Platform
Electrical Muscle Stimulation
Advanced EMS technology delivers controlled electrical energy to the targeted muscles, producing repeated involuntary contractions during the treatment.
These contractions activate and engage the underlying muscles without requiring the client to perform conventional exercise during the session.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock toning and shaping
-
Thigh muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition programs
-
Calf muscle conditioning
-
General body-sculpting treatments
Targeted RF/Energy Treatment
The integrated RF/energy function is designed to complement muscle stimulation by targeting areas where clients want to improve the appearance of localized fat and body contours.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline shaping
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock definition
-
Upper-arm shaping
-
Targeted body-toning programs
Simultaneous Muscle and Body-Contouring Treatment
EMSZero combines muscle stimulation and targeted fat-reduction energy in a single professional session. This enables practitioners to address both muscle tone and overall body shape using one system.
The combined approach can be incorporated into personalized programs designed to support:
-
Improved muscle definition
-
A firmer-looking body contour
-
Targeted body shaping
-
Enhanced treatment efficiency
-
Customized multi-area programs
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Muscle-Conditioning Program
Designed to focus primarily on repeated muscle contractions and targeted muscle engagement.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock toning
-
Arm muscle stimulation
-
Thigh and calf conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved muscle definition
-
Busy clients interested in assisted muscle stimulation
-
Clients combining professional treatments with fitness programs
Body-Contouring Program
Focuses on the appearance of localized fat and overall body shape in selected treatment areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline shaping
-
Thigh contouring
-
Upper-arm shaping
Recommended for:
-
Clients with localized body-contouring concerns
-
Clients seeking a firmer-looking silhouette
-
Clients following a balanced wellness program
Combined Muscle and Fat Program
Uses the machine’s dual-action functions to address muscle conditioning and body contouring during the same treatment program.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal sculpting
-
Buttock shaping
-
Thigh definition
-
Arm contouring
-
Full-body sculpting packages
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking a comprehensive body-sculpting program
-
Clients wanting to address muscle tone and body shape together
-
Professional clinics offering premium combined treatments
Maintenance Program
Designed to help clients maintain their body-contouring and muscle-conditioning programs after completing an initial treatment course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-conditioning maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Seasonal body-shaping programs
-
Continued wellness support
Recommended for:
-
Returning body-contouring clients
-
Clients who have completed six to eight sessions
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise and healthy lifestyle habits
Customizable Frequency and Treatment Settings
The EMSZero system allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the selected body area, client comfort, and treatment objective.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Machine Power | 6000W | Professional system performance |
| Frequency Range | 1–100Hz | Customizable muscle-stimulation programs |
| Treatment Applicators | Four | Multi-area body treatments |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30 minutes | Efficient clinic scheduling |
| Recommended Course | Six to eight sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | One to two sessions weekly | Progressive treatment planning |
| Control System | Intelligent touchscreen | Protocol and intensity management |
All settings should be selected according to professional consultation, client suitability, and individual tolerance.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waist
The applicators can be positioned over the abdominal area to support muscle conditioning, waistline definition, and a firmer-looking midsection.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle stimulation
-
Waistline shaping
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Improved abdominal definition
Buttocks and Thighs
Treatments can be customized for the buttocks, inner thighs, outer thighs, and front or back of the legs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock toning
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Lower-body contouring
-
Improved leg definition
Arms and Calves
The specialized applicators can also be used for smaller muscle groups and targeted body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Biceps and triceps stimulation
-
Calf muscle conditioning
-
Targeted limb definition
Professional Body-Contouring Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Suitable Program |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Muscle or combined program |
| Waist | Improve the appearance of body contours | Body-contouring program |
| Buttocks | Toning, shaping, and muscle stimulation | Muscle or combined program |
| Thighs | Lower-body conditioning and contouring | Combined program |
| Upper Arms | Muscle stimulation and arm shaping | Muscle or combined program |
| Calves | Targeted muscle conditioning | Muscle-conditioning program |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment goals, target areas, and potential contraindications. Explain the treatment experience and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the appropriate applicators and position them securely over the chosen treatment area. Placement should be adjusted according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objective.
Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select the treatment protocol, frequency, intensity, and session duration. Begin at a comfortable intensity and increase progressively according to client tolerance.
Step 4: Active Treatment
The system delivers controlled muscle stimulation and the selected body-contouring energy for approximately 30 minutes. The client experiences strong, repeated muscle contractions during the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
The system completes the selected program automatically. The applicators are removed, and the practitioner provides any appropriate aftercare or treatment-plan recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The EMSZero 2-in-1 system combines versatile body-contouring functions with straightforward professional operation.
Key advantages include:
-
Two treatment functions on one platform
-
Four specialized treatment applicators
-
Adjustable 1–100Hz frequency range
-
6000W machine power
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Automatic intensity control
-
Temperature monitoring
-
Automatic shut-off
-
Universal 110V–240V power compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and technical support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine |
| Technology | Electrical Muscle Stimulation and RF/energy body contouring |
| Machine Power | 6000W |
| Frequency Range | 1–100Hz adjustable |
| Treatment Applicators | Four specialized applicators |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Six to eight sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | One to two sessions per week |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves |
| Control System | Intelligent touchscreen |
| Treatment Programs | Pre-programmed and customizable protocols |
| Safety Features | Automatic intensity control, temperature monitoring, and automatic shut-off |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Body Sculpting Machine
-
4 × Specialized treatment applicators
-
1 × Intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Integrated EMS muscle-stimulation function
-
Integrated RF/energy body-contouring function
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Adjustable 1–150Hz frequency controls
-
1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Operating and safety guide
-
Muscle-conditioning protocol guidance
-
Body-contouring protocol guidance
-
Combined-treatment protocol guidance
-
Client consultation materials
-
Treatment-plan templates
-
Service-menu and package guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine includes professional operating guidance to help your team use the equipment confidently and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen and program operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Frequency and intensity adjustment
-
Muscle-conditioning protocols
-
Combined body-contouring protocols
-
Treatment safety and contraindications
-
Routine cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional warranty for dependable after-sales protection.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are provided for eligible warranty issues.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine must be operated according to the supplied manual and applicable local requirements.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Serious muscle or neurological disorders
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with medical concerns should consult an appropriate healthcare professional before beginning treatment.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 system is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Beauty salons
-
Wellness centers
-
Fitness and recovery studios
-
Aesthetic practices
-
Professional treatment facilities
Operators should review local licensing, insurance, and treatment requirements before offering services.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1?
Two Functions on One Platform
The system combines muscle stimulation and targeted body-contouring energy, allowing practitioners to create more comprehensive treatment programs with one machine.
Four Specialized Applicators
Four applicators support flexible placement across different body areas and allow clinics to design personalized treatments.
Customizable Professional Settings
The adjustable 1–100Hz frequency range, intensity controls, and pre-programmed protocols support individualized muscle-conditioning and body-contouring sessions.
Multiple Treatment Areas
One system can be used for the abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, upper arms, and calves, expanding the range of services available to clients.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes training, operating documentation, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine?
It is a professional body-contouring system that combines electrical muscle stimulation with targeted RF/energy technology to support muscle conditioning and body-shaping programs.
How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment session takes approximately 30 minutes, depending on the target area and selected protocol.
How many applicators are included?
The machine includes four specialized treatment applicators for different body areas and treatment objectives.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, waist, buttocks, inner and outer thighs, upper arms, and calves.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends a course of six to eight sessions, generally scheduled once or twice per week. The final plan should be personalized following professional consultation.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. The intensity can be adjusted progressively according to individual tolerance and comfort.
Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system does not require surgery, injections, incisions, or anesthesia.
Can muscle stimulation and body contouring be performed together?
Yes. The dual-action system is designed to combine muscle stimulation and targeted body-contouring energy within one treatment program.
Does the machine have adjustable intensity?
Yes. Practitioners can adjust the treatment intensity and frequency according to the selected body area, protocol, and client comfort.
Can it be offered as a standalone service?
Yes. Clinics can offer EMSZero as a standalone body-sculpting treatment or combine it with compatible wellness and aesthetic services.
Are results the same for every client?
No. Outcomes vary according to body composition, treatment consistency, lifestyle, selected settings, and individual response. Practitioners should provide realistic expectations during consultation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Operating guidance, treatment protocol instruction, safety training, and ongoing technical support are included.
Add Professional Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine enables clinics, spas, and wellness centers to provide customizable muscle-conditioning and body-contouring services using one professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Dual-action muscle stimulation and body contouring
-
Four specialized treatment applicators
-
Multiple treatment areas and customizable protocols
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
From $3,999.00
EMS, RF and Neo RF Body Sculpting in One System
The EMS Zero Ultra 6500W EMS RF Body Sculpting Machine combines electromagnetic muscle stimulation, radio-frequency energy, and Neo RF programs in one professional cosmetic system. It is designed for body-contouring, muscle-stimulation, and skin-firming applications on selected body areas.
Four ergonomic applicators, adjustable operating parameters, automatic and manual programs, and a large touchscreen allow operators to create a convenient treatment experience for different client requirements.
Product Highlights
- EMS electromagnetic muscle stimulation
- Radio-frequency technology
- Neo RF programs
- Up to 14 Tesla magnetic intensity
- 6500W rated power
- Four body applicators
- Multiple applicators can operate simultaneously
- Automatic and manual programs
- Large touchscreen control panel
- Adjustable treatment parameters
- Upgraded heat-dissipation system
- Mobile wheeled design
- AC 110V and 220V configurations
- Suitable for professional and personal cosmetic use
- 3-year warranty support
How the EMS Zero Ultra Works
The machine delivers electromagnetic energy through applicators placed over the selected body area. This energy stimulates repeated muscle contractions without requiring the user to perform each contraction voluntarily.
RF and Neo RF functions provide controlled heating during compatible programs. Combining muscle stimulation with RF energy allows the operator to offer a comprehensive cosmetic body-sculpting experience from one system.
Available intensity, time, and program settings can be adjusted through the touchscreen according to the treatment area, user comfort, and manufacturer instructions.
Three Technologies in One System
EMS Muscle Stimulation
The applicators deliver electromagnetic pulses that stimulate repeated contractions in the targeted muscles. This function is intended to support professional cosmetic muscle-conditioning and body-sculpting programs.
The operator should begin at a comfortable intensity and increase it gradually according to the user’s tolerance.
Radio-Frequency Technology
The integrated RF function delivers controlled thermal energy during compatible programs. It is intended to complement body-contouring and skin-firming cosmetic applications.
Settings must be selected according to the supplied operating instructions and individual user comfort.
Neo RF Programs
Neo RF provides additional operating options within the system. The available parameters allow trained operators to adapt each session to the selected area and intended cosmetic application.
The exact Neo RF settings and operating modes may depend on the ordered machine configuration.
Four Applicators for Efficient Operation
The EMS Zero Ultra is equipped with four ergonomic body applicators. Multiple applicators can be positioned over selected areas, helping operators create a convenient workflow during compatible programs.
Adjustable fastening straps hold the applicators securely in position. Integrated holders on both sides of the main unit provide organized storage between sessions.
Suitable Treatment Areas
According to the manufacturer’s documentation, the system can be used on areas including:
- Abdomen
- Arms
- Thighs
- Buttocks
Applicator position, intensity, and operating time should always follow the user manual and appropriate operator guidance.
Supports Professional Body-Contouring Programs
The EMS Zero Ultra can be incorporated into cosmetic programs focused on:
- Muscle stimulation
- Body contouring
- Body shaping
- Muscle conditioning
- Cosmetic skin firming
- Abdominal definition
- Buttocks conditioning
- Arm and thigh treatments
The machine does not guarantee a specific reduction in fat, increase in muscle, or other physical result. Outcomes and individual experiences may vary.
Large Touchscreen Control Panel
The integrated touchscreen gives operators convenient access to available programs, applicator controls, intensity levels, and operating settings.
The interface allows compatible applicators to be monitored and adjusted from one central screen. Automatic programs provide a simplified workflow, while manual controls allow more experienced operators to customize the available parameters.
Adjustable Automatic and Manual Programs
The EMS Zero Ultra supports both automatic and manual operation.
Automatic programs provide preset operating sequences for convenient everyday use. Manual mode allows trained operators to adjust the available parameters according to the selected area and individual comfort level.
Always begin at a low, comfortable intensity when working with a new user. Increase the intensity gradually rather than immediately selecting the maximum output.
Upgraded Heat-Dissipation System
Multiple ventilation areas are integrated into the machine to support heat dissipation during operation. The upgraded cooling design helps the system maintain consistent performance during regular studio use.
Air inlets and outlets must remain unobstructed. Leave sufficient open space around the unit and follow the ventilation and maintenance instructions in the user manual.
Mobile Professional Design
The EMS Zero Ultra features a modern upright cabinet with a stable wheeled base. It can be repositioned within a treatment room when necessary and secured in place during operation.
The organized applicator holders, large touchscreen, durable cabinet, and black-and-gold design create a premium appearance suitable for modern cosmetic environments.
Comfortable and Convenient Operation
A typical operating process includes:
- Position the machine in a stable and properly ventilated area.
- Select the appropriate applicators for the intended body area.
- Secure the applicators with the supplied straps.
- Choose an automatic or manual program.
- Begin with a comfortable intensity.
- Increase the intensity gradually according to tolerance.
- Monitor the user and machine throughout the session.
- Clean and store the applicators after use.
Program duration and settings should be selected according to the user manual instead of applying one fixed setting to every user.
Why Choose the EMS Zero Ultra?
- Combines EMS, RF, and Neo RF
- Up to 14 Tesla magnetic intensity
- 6500W rated power
- Four ergonomic applicators
- Simultaneous multi-applicator operation
- Automatic and manual programs
- Adjustable operating parameters
- Large touchscreen interface
- Upgraded heat-dissipation system
- Integrated applicator holders
- Mobile wheeled cabinet
- Suitable for several body areas
- CE and RoHS
- 3-year warranty support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | EMSZero Ultra |
| Product type | EMS and RF cosmetic body-sculpting machine |
| Technologies | EMS, RF and Neo RF |
| Rated power | 6500W |
| Maximum magnetic intensity | Up to 14 Tesla |
| Number of applicators | Four |
| Operating modes | Automatic and manual |
| Treatment type | Non-invasive cosmetic application |
| Treatment areas | Abdomen, arms, thighs and buttocks |
| Control system | Large touchscreen interface |
| Power supply | AC 110V or 220V |
| Installation | Mobile wheeled unit |
| Intended settings | Professional studios and personal cosmetic use |
| Certifications | CE and RoHS |
| Warranty | 3-year warranty support |
Specifications may vary slightly according to the selected configuration. Confirm the required voltage, plug type, applicators, and final specifications before ordering.
Suitable for Professional and Personal Settings
The EMS Zero Ultra may be suitable for:
- Beauty salons
- Cosmetic studios
- Body-contouring centers
- Spas and wellness centers
- Fitness and body-conditioning studios
- Qualified personal users
Commercial operators should complete suitable training, follow applicable local regulations, and screen each client before use.
Package Contents
- EMS Zero Ultra main unit
- Four EMS/RF body applicators
- Applicator fastening straps
- Applicator connection cables
- Power cable
- User manual
- Standard accessories for the selected configuration
The exact contents should be confirmed on the final quotation before placing an order.
Warranty and Support
WikBeauty provides 3-year warranty support in accordance with the applicable warranty conditions. Technical support is available for installation, operation, troubleshooting, and routine maintenance questions.
Important Safety Information
Do not use the EMS Zero Ultra during pregnancy or if the user has a pacemaker, implanted electronic device, or metal implant near the intended treatment area.
People with recent surgery, active infection, unexplained pain, impaired sensation, or a diagnosed health condition should consult a qualified healthcare professional before use.
This machine is intended for cosmetic body-sculpting and muscle-stimulation applications. It is not intended to diagnose, treat, cure, monitor, or prevent any disease or injury. Results vary between individuals.
Order the EMS Zero Ultra Body Sculpting Machine
Add EMS muscle stimulation, RF energy, and Neo RF programs to your cosmetic services with one professional platform. The EMS Zero Ultra provides four applicators, adjustable automatic and manual programs, up to 14 Tesla intensity, and a modern mobile design.
Select the required voltage and plug configuration and order your EMS Zero Ultra today.
Receives in 8 days.
$1,599.00
Professional Portable Electromagnetic Shockwave System
Wireless Technology for Qualified Medical and Men’s Health Practices
The ESWT PRO is a compact electromagnetic shockwave system developed for qualified healthcare professionals and specialized clinical environments.
A wireless treatment handpiece, 7-inch touchscreen, adjustable intensity and pre-programmed operating modes support flexible use in men’s health, rehabilitation and other applications permitted by the device’s certification and local regulations.
At approximately 4.5 kg, the system is suitable for clinics requiring a compact platform that can be repositioned or transported between approved treatment locations.
Electromagnetic technology | Wireless handpiece | 4.5 kg system | Three-year warranty
Electromagnetic Shockwave Technology
ESWT PRO generates shockwave pulses using an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor.
Key operating features include:
-
Adjustable intensity from levels 1–10
-
Selectable pulse frequency from 10–20 Hz
-
Wireless treatment handpiece
-
Precision applicator
-
Pre-programmed operating modes
-
Color touchscreen control
-
Rechargeable portable operation
Electromagnetic and pneumatic systems use different energy-generation mechanisms. One technology should not be described as universally safer, more effective or more comfortable without direct comparative evidence for the specific devices.
Portable Wireless Design
The ESWT PRO platform is designed for professional mobility within appropriate clinical environments.
Lightweight System
At approximately 4.5 kg, the system is easier to transport and reposition than many full-size shockwave platforms.
Wireless Handpiece
The rechargeable handpiece reduces cable restrictions during operation and can be returned to the supplied charging dock between treatments.
Extended Battery Operation
The supplied specification lists more than 10 hours of operation per full charge. Actual battery life may vary according to intensity, frequency, treatment duration and battery condition.
Compact Desktop Footprint
The system measures approximately 28 × 22 × 15 cm with its dock, allowing installation in treatment rooms where space is limited.
Portable design does not automatically authorize house calls or mobile medical treatment. Operators remain responsible for maintaining privacy, hygiene, documentation, electrical safety and local healthcare compliance.
Potential Professional Applications
Depending on the device’s registered indications and applicable local regulations, shockwave technology may be evaluated for use within professional programs concerning:
-
Selected cases of vasculogenic erectile dysfunction
-
Men’s sexual-health assessment programs
-
Rehabilitation applications
-
Musculoskeletal treatment protocols
-
Other manufacturer-authorized professional uses
Low-intensity shockwave therapy should not be advertised as suitable for every cause or severity of erectile dysfunction.
ED may have vascular, neurological, hormonal, medication-related, psychological or mixed causes. Proper medical assessment is required before determining whether shockwave treatment is appropriate.
Evidence-Informed Positioning for Erectile Dysfunction
Published research suggests that low-intensity shockwave therapy may produce a modest improvement in erectile-function scores in some men with vasculogenic ED.
However:
-
Results are not consistent across all studies
-
Device technologies and energy outputs vary
-
Treatment protocols are not fully standardized
-
Not every ED cause is vascular
-
Benefits may diminish over time
-
No result can be guaranteed
-
Regulatory status differs between countries
Clinical Use Requires Proper Patient Selection
Appropriate patient assessment should include:
-
Complete medical history
-
Sexual history
-
Medication review
-
Cardiovascular-risk assessment
-
Identification of possible vascular, hormonal or neurological causes
-
Review of previous ED treatments
-
Physical examination where clinically indicated
-
Validated erectile-function questionnaire where appropriate
-
Discussion of available treatment alternatives
-
Informed consent
Only a qualified healthcare professional should diagnose erectile dysfunction or decide whether shockwave therapy is appropriate.
Important Limitations of Use
ESWT PRO should not be promoted for:
-
Guaranteed treatment of all ED severity levels
-
Permanent restoration of erectile function
-
Premature-ejaculation treatment without supporting indication
-
Dissolution of Peyronie’s plaque
-
Correction of penile curvature
-
Guaranteed recovery following prostate surgery
-
Replacement of prescribed medication
-
Unsupervised home use
-
Sexual-performance enhancement in clients without medical assessment
For Peyronie’s disease, shockwave therapy may be considered for pain in some circumstances, but it should not be marketed as reducing plaque size or correcting curvature.
Professional Treatment Workflow
1. Medical Assessment
A qualified professional reviews the patient’s medical and sexual history, cardiovascular status, medications, previous treatments and possible contraindications.
2. Treatment Planning
The clinician determines whether shockwave therapy is appropriate and selects a protocol consistent with the device instructions and applicable clinical guidance.
3. System Preparation
The wireless handpiece is checked, the applicator is prepared and the treatment area is positioned according to the approved protocol.
4. Parameter Selection
Intensity, frequency, pulse count and treatment locations are selected by the qualified operator.
5. Controlled Treatment
Shockwave pulses are delivered while the operator monitors patient comfort and tissue response.
6. Post-Treatment Review
The patient receives appropriate guidance, and the treatment parameters and any adverse responses are documented.
7. Follow-Up Assessment
Progress should be evaluated using an appropriate clinical method rather than relying only on subjective marketing claims.
Treatment Protocols
The appropriate protocol depends on:
-
Confirmed diagnosis
-
Device energy characteristics
-
Energy flux density
-
Pulse count
-
Pulse frequency
-
Treatment locations
-
Patient response
-
Clinical guidance
-
Local regulatory requirements
The supplied specifications mention pre-programmed ED modes and typical sessions of approximately 12–15 minutes. These settings should not be represented as universal clinical protocols.
A fixed course of 12–16 treatments, monthly maintenance or permanent maintenance benefits should not be promised without evidence for the specific device and patient.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | ESWT PRO |
| Product type | Portable professional shockwave system |
| Energy-generation method | Electromagnetic |
| Adjustable intensity | Levels 1–10 |
| Pulse frequency | 10–20 Hz |
| Treatment handpiece | Wireless rechargeable handpiece |
| User interface | 7-inch color touchscreen |
| Pre-programmed modes | Five ED-focused operating programs |
| Typical session duration | Approximately 12–15 minutes, protocol dependent |
| Listed battery operation | More than 10 hours per charge |
| Charging system | Desktop charging dock |
| System weight | Approximately 4.5 kg |
| Dimensions with dock | Approximately 28 × 22 × 15 cm |
| Warranty | Three-year limited parts warranty |
| Technical support | Lifetime remote support |
| Certification | CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation |
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One ESWT PRO control system
-
One wireless treatment handpiece
-
One precision applicator
-
One desktop charging dock
-
Power supply suitable for the selected market
Documentation and Certification
-
English user manual
-
CE certificate
-
Applicable ISO documentation
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
Operating instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Technical-support information
Professional Training
-
Equipment setup training
-
Touchscreen and handpiece operation
-
Intensity and frequency adjustment
-
Patient-screening guidance
-
Contraindication review
-
Treatment documentation
-
Cleaning and infection-control guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting
-
Training certificate after completion
Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
CE-Certified Professional System
The ESWT PRO comes with:
-
CE Certificate
-
Applicable ISO Documentation
The equipment must be used only for the indications and within the jurisdictions covered by its applicable certification and registration.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering:
-
System installation
-
Wireless handpiece charging
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Applicator preparation
-
Intensity and frequency controls
-
Pre-programmed modes
-
Patient-screening principles
-
Basic operating procedures
-
Cleaning and maintenance
-
Troubleshooting
A training certificate is provided after completion.
Equipment training does not qualify an unlicensed person to diagnose or treat erectile dysfunction. Medical training, professional licensing and local authorization remain the operator’s responsibility.
Three-Year Parts Warranty
The ESWT PRO is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical support.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main control system
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen
-
Original wireless handpiece
-
Charging dock
-
Power-supply components
-
Other eligible original parts
Battery cells, applicators and other consumable or limited-life components may have separate coverage conditions.
Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repair or modification
-
Incorrect charging or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping the handpiece
-
Normal battery degradation
-
Normal applicator wear
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Use outside the supplied instructions
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Contraindications and Clinical Precautions
This is professional equipment. Screening must be performed by a qualified healthcare professional.
Treatment may be contraindicated or require additional assessment in patients with:
-
Active infection or inflammation in the treatment area
-
Open wounds or significant skin injury
-
Active malignancy in or near the treatment area
-
Significant bleeding disorders
-
Anticoagulant use
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Implanted devices affected by electromagnetic equipment
-
Severe uncontrolled cardiovascular disease
-
Untreated hypertension
-
Significant neurological impairment affecting sensation
-
Other contraindications identified in the user manual
Penile implants, recent pelvic procedures and complex urological conditions require specialist evaluation.
This is not an exhaustive list. The operator must follow the device manual, applicable medical guidance and local regulations.
Intended Professional Users
ESWT PRO is intended for appropriately qualified professionals working in settings such as:
-
Urology practices
-
Sexual-medicine clinics
-
Men’s health centers
-
Licensed medical clinics
-
Rehabilitation practices where the device is appropriately registered
-
Qualified multidisciplinary healthcare centers
The device is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose ESWT PRO?
Electromagnetic Energy Generation
The system uses an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor.
Wireless Handpiece
Rechargeable wireless operation supports flexible positioning during professional use.
Compact 4.5 kg Design
The lightweight system is easier to transport and install than many full-size shockwave platforms.
Adjustable Operation
Ten intensity levels and selectable 10–20 Hz frequency support protocol customization by qualified operators.
Touchscreen Interface
A 7-inch color display provides access to controls and pre-programmed modes.
Professional Training
Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included.
Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical assistance.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is electromagnetic shockwave therapy?
It is a method of generating shockwave pulses through an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor. Treatment characteristics depend on the device’s energy output, applicator and settings.
Is it appropriate for every type of ED?
No. ED has vascular, neurological, hormonal, psychological, medication-related and mixed causes. Medical assessment is necessary before treatment.
Is the treatment completely painless?
Patient experience varies. Adjustable intensity may help manage comfort, but pressure, vibration, sensitivity or discomfort may occur.
How many sessions are required?
There is no universal protocol suitable for every device or patient. Session number and frequency must be selected by a qualified clinician.
Can this machine be used for home visits?
Portable design may support professional mobility where legally permitted. The operator must maintain clinical privacy, sanitation, documentation and regulatory compliance.
Is the device approved for ED treatment in every country?
No. Regulatory status and permitted indications vary by jurisdiction. The device must only be marketed and used within the indications covered by its applicable registration.
Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This training does not replace professional medical qualifications.
What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved parts. Consumables, normal battery wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded.
What certifications are included?
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation.
Add Portable Shockwave Technology to Your Practice
ESWT PRO combines:
-
Electromagnetic shockwave generation
-
Wireless handpiece operation
-
Ten adjustable intensity levels
-
A compact 4.5 kg design
-
A seven-inch touchscreen interface
Available exclusively for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations.
Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Receives in 8 days.
$399.00
Professional Four-in-One Electrotherapy and Physiotherapy System
Four Treatment Functions for Body Contouring, Muscle Stimulation and Wellness
The WikBeauty 4-in-1 Fat Burning, Muscle Building, Breast Enhancement and Physiotherapy Machine is a multifunctional electrotherapy platform developed for slimming clinics, physiotherapy centers, beauty salons and professional wellness facilities.
The system provides four selectable treatment functions for body-contouring support, muscle stimulation, breast-area firming and physiotherapy-oriented wellness programs.
Its adjustable 1–10MHz frequency range, maximum 500W output, intelligent power control, cooling system and 10–12-inch touchscreen support customized treatments for different body areas and professional objectives.
Four treatment functions | 1–10MHz adjustable frequency | 500W maximum power | Three-year warranty
Four Treatment Functions on One Professional Platform
Body-Contouring Support
The body-contouring function uses adjustable electrotherapy stimulation for professional programs targeting suitable body areas.
Common treatment applications include:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Waist-contouring programs
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh treatments
-
Buttock treatments
-
General body-sculpting services
Muscle Stimulation
The muscle-stimulation function applies controlled electrical impulses to suitable muscle groups.
Common treatment applications include:
-
Muscle-activation programs
-
Muscle-toning support
-
Abdomen and core treatments
-
Upper-arm conditioning
-
Thigh and gluteal programs
-
Fitness-oriented services
Breast-Area Firming
The breast-area function is intended for appropriate professional firming and appearance-enhancement protocols.
Common treatment applications include:
-
Breast-area firming support
-
Upper-chest toning programs
-
Appearance-focused treatments
-
Tissue-stimulation protocols
-
Beauty-care services
-
Customized professional programs
This function should not be represented as producing permanent breast enlargement or replacing surgical breast procedures.
Physiotherapy and Recovery
The physiotherapy function supports professionally planned muscle-relaxation, recovery and circulation-focused programs.
Common treatment applications include:
-
Post-workout recovery
-
Tired-muscle relaxation
-
Muscle-stimulation programs
-
Circulation-focused wellness
-
General physiotherapy support
-
Maintenance-oriented recovery sessions
The appropriate function, applicator, frequency, intensity and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Function for Each Client
The system supports four independent treatment functions. The appropriate program should be selected following consultation and contraindication assessment.
Function 1: Body Contouring
A body-focused program for suitable areas requiring contour-refinement and skin-firming support.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen
-
Waistline
-
Upper arms
-
Thighs
Recommended for:
-
Slimming clinics
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Beauty salons
-
Clients seeking non-surgical body-care services
Function 2: Muscle Stimulation
A fitness-oriented program for suitable muscle groups.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscles
-
Upper arms
-
Thighs
-
Gluteal muscles
Recommended for:
-
Fitness and wellness centers
-
Muscle-toning programs
-
Post-weight-management clients
-
Professional body-conditioning services
Function 3: Breast-Area Firming
An appearance-focused program for appropriate breast and upper-chest areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Breast-area firming
-
Upper-chest muscle stimulation
-
Appearance-enhancement programs
-
Customized beauty treatments
Recommended for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Professional firming services
-
Appropriately assessed clients
Function 4: Physiotherapy and Recovery
A recovery-oriented program for suitable muscles and body areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Post-workout recovery
-
Muscle-relaxation programs
-
Circulation support
-
General physiotherapy services
Recommended for:
-
Physiotherapy centers
-
Wellness clinics
-
Fitness facilities
-
Recovery-oriented businesses
Adjustable Frequency for Customized Electrotherapy
The system provides an adjustable frequency range from 1MHz to 10MHz together with intelligent power control.
| Treatment Setting | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower Setting | First-time clients and comfort-focused treatments |
| Moderate Setting | General body-contouring and muscle-stimulation programs |
| Higher Setting | Appropriately selected professional protocols |
| Customized Setting | Treatment-specific frequency and intensity selection |
The adjustable controls give trained operators greater flexibility over treatment intensity and client comfort.
New clients should begin with lower settings before frequency or intensity is increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The multifunctional applicators support professional treatment of several body areas.
Upper-Body Treatments
-
Upper arms
-
Suitable chest areas
-
Upper back
-
Waist
-
Other professionally assessed areas
Core and Lower-Body Treatments
-
Abdomen
-
Waistline
-
Thighs
-
Buttocks
-
Suitable leg areas
Recovery and Wellness Treatments
-
Suitable muscle groups
-
Post-workout areas
-
Tired muscles
-
Body-conditioning programs
-
General physiotherapy applications
-
Maintenance-oriented wellness sessions
Professional Body and Wellness Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected function, applicator, frequency, intensity and professional protocol.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Function | Intended Aesthetic or Wellness Application |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Body contouring or muscle stimulation | Core and body-contour support |
| Waistline | Body contouring | Waist-contour refinement |
| Upper arms | Body contouring or muscle stimulation | Arm-toning support |
| Thighs | Body contouring or muscle stimulation | Lower-body conditioning |
| Buttocks | Muscle stimulation | Gluteal-toning support |
| Breast and upper chest | Breast-area firming | Appearance and firming support |
| Post-workout muscles | Physiotherapy | Recovery-oriented wellness |
| Suitable body areas | Customized function | Professional electrotherapy programs |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s health history, treatment objectives, selected body areas and contraindications. The appropriate treatment function is then selected.
2. Applicator Preparation
The required treatment areas are prepared according to the operating protocol. The appropriate applicators are installed and positioned correctly.
3. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the treatment function, frequency, intensity, session duration and other available settings according to client tolerance and professional protocol.
4. Electrotherapy Treatment
The machine delivers controlled electrotherapy stimulation through the selected applicators. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes per treatment area.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the applicators are removed and the treatment areas are inspected. The client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance.
Temporary tingling, warmth, redness, muscle fatigue or soreness may occur following treatment.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines four selectable functions with intelligent touchscreen controls for efficient professional operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Four independent treatment functions
-
Adjustable 1–10MHz frequency range
-
Maximum 500W power output
-
10–12-inch touchscreen
-
Intelligent power control
-
Integrated cooling system
-
Multifunctional applicator handles
-
110V and 220V compatibility
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | WikBeauty 4-in-1 Electrotherapy Machine |
| Product Type | Professional multifunctional electrotherapy and physiotherapy system |
| Technology | Electrotherapy and physiotherapy stimulation |
| Number of Functions | Four independent treatment modes |
| Functions | Body contouring, muscle stimulation, breast-area firming and physiotherapy |
| Frequency Range | 1–10MHz adjustable |
| Maximum Power | 500W |
| Display | 10–12-inch touchscreen |
| Applicators | Multifunctional treatment handles |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, buttocks, breast area and suitable muscle groups |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes per area |
| Suggested Course | Approximately 2–3 sessions per week for 4–6 weeks |
| Safety System | Intelligent power control and cooling system |
| Voltage Options | 110V and 220V |
| Warranty | Three-year warranty |
| Training | Professional equipment training |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, multifunctional applicators and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One 4-in-1 Electrotherapy Machine
-
Multifunctional treatment applicators
-
Applicator-connection components
-
Required positioning accessories
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Training guide
-
Warranty card
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Applicator setup instructions
-
Treatment-function selection
-
Frequency and intensity guidance
-
Body-area positioning information
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Applicator installation
-
Treatment-function selection
-
Frequency adjustment
-
Intensity selection
-
Body-area positioning
-
Client-comfort monitoring
-
Basic treatment protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The WikBeauty 4-in-1 Electrotherapy Machine is supported by a three-year warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Intelligent power-control system
-
Integrated cooling system
-
Original treatment applicators
-
Applicator-connection components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement components
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect applicator placement or operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of applicators and external components
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional electrotherapy equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Severe cardiovascular conditions
-
Epilepsy
-
Active or suspected blood clots
-
Open wounds or active infections
-
Severe skin conditions in the treatment area
-
Recent surgery
-
Acute inflammation
-
Severe nerve disorders or reduced sensation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Electrical stimulation must not be applied across the chest, through the head, over the front or side of the neck, directly over the heart, or over implanted electronic devices.
Breast-area applications require careful professional assessment and must not place electrical current across the chest or heart.
The selected frequency and intensity must remain comfortable throughout treatment.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Slimming clinics
-
Physiotherapy centers
-
Beauty salons
-
Wellness clinics
-
Aesthetic centers
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Fitness and recovery facilities
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Qualified healthcare professionals
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the WikBeauty Four-in-One Electrotherapy System?
Access Four Treatment Functions
One professional platform supports body-contouring, muscle-stimulation, breast-area firming and physiotherapy-oriented programs.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
The multifunctional applicators support professional protocols for the abdomen, waist, upper arms, thighs, buttocks and suitable muscle groups.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable frequency, intensity and treatment modes allow sessions to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives.
Expand Your Service Menu
The system allows clinics to create body-contouring packages, muscle-stimulation programs, firming services and recovery-oriented treatments.
Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and after-sales support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What are the four treatment functions?
The system provides selectable functions for body-contouring support, muscle stimulation, breast-area firming and physiotherapy-oriented wellness programs.
How does the muscle-stimulation function work?
The system applies controlled electrical stimulation to suitable muscle groups. Frequency and intensity can be adjusted according to the treatment area and client tolerance.
Can the machine permanently enlarge breasts?
No permanent breast enlargement should be guaranteed. The breast-area mode is intended for appropriate professional firming and appearance-enhancement programs.
Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, waist, upper arms, thighs, buttocks, appropriate breast and upper-chest areas, and professionally assessed muscle groups.
How long does a session take?
A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes per treatment area. The exact duration depends on the selected function and professional protocol.
How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional course may include approximately 2–3 sessions per week for 4–6 weeks. The final schedule depends on the client’s condition, objectives and response.
Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients may feel tingling, warmth or muscle stimulation. Intensity should be adjusted to remain comfortable, and treatment should be stopped if pain occurs.
Can the machine replace regular exercise?
No. Electrotherapy may complement professionally planned fitness and wellness routines, but it does not replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition or healthy lifestyle habits.
Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, tingling, fatigue or muscle soreness may occur.
Is professional training included?
Professional equipment training covers machine setup, applicator positioning, function selection, frequency and intensity adjustment, treatment protocols, cleaning and safety.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Multifunctional Electrotherapy to Your Business
The WikBeauty 4-in-1 Electrotherapy Machine combines:
-
Four independent treatment functions
-
Adjustable 1–10MHz frequency
-
A 10–12-inch touchscreen
-
Professional body and wellness applications
-
Three-year warranty and professional training
Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment functions, applicators and professional training.
Order Your Four-in-One Electrotherapy Machine and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$2,599.00
Professional Fibroblast Plasma Pen System
Precision Plasma Technology for Skin Tightening and Rejuvenation
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen is a professional aesthetic device developed for beauty clinics, medical spas, professional skin-care studios and qualified aesthetic practitioners.
The pen produces a controlled electrical arc between the device tip and the skin’s surface. This creates a localized thermal effect that supports professional skin-tightening, texture-refinement and rejuvenation protocols.
Its compact pen design allows trained practitioners to work precisely on selected facial and body areas according to the client’s skin condition and professional treatment plan.
Precision plasma arc | Targeted skin treatments | Professional operation | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Applications on One Plasma Platform
Fine-Line and Wrinkle Treatments
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen supports professionally planned treatments for the appearance of suitable facial lines and wrinkles.
Common applications include:
-
Forehead-line appearance
-
Suitable eye-area lines
-
Crow’s-feet appearance
-
Upper-lip lines
-
Lower-face lines
-
General anti-aging protocols
Skin-Tightening Programs
The controlled plasma arc creates localized thermal effects on selected skin areas.
Common applications include:
-
Loose-looking facial skin
-
Jawline skin tightening
-
Suitable neck areas
-
Forehead treatments
-
Lower-face rejuvenation
-
Professional firming programs
Scar and Texture Refinement
The plasma pen can be incorporated into professional protocols intended to improve the appearance of selected scars and uneven-looking texture.
Common applications include:
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Suitable surgical scars
-
Uneven-looking skin texture
-
Localized skin imperfections
-
Surface texture refinement
-
Professional skin-renewal treatments
Eye-Area Rejuvenation
The precision tip allows trained practitioners to work on appropriate areas surrounding the eyes.
Common applications include:
-
Upper-eye-area skin
-
Lower-eye-area skin
-
Crow’s-feet appearance
-
Fine lines around the eyes
-
Suitable brow-area treatments
-
Professional eye-contour protocols
Plasma energy must never be applied directly to the eye, eyeball, wet eyelid margin or other prohibited anatomical structures.
The appropriate intensity, treatment pattern, point spacing and session duration should be selected according to the client’s skin type, treatment area and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen supports customized protocols for different professional aesthetic objectives.
Program 1: Fine Lines and Wrinkles
A precision-focused program for suitable facial lines and small treatment areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Forehead lines
-
Crow’s-feet appearance
-
Upper-lip lines
-
Lower-face wrinkles
Recommended for:
-
Anti-aging clinics
-
Professional skin-care studios
-
Medical spas
-
Clients seeking targeted rejuvenation
Program 2: Facial Skin Tightening
A customized program for suitable areas of loose-looking facial skin.
Recommended applications:
-
Lower-face tightening
-
Jawline skin
-
Forehead areas
-
Suitable neck areas
Recommended for:
-
Facial-rejuvenation services
-
Professional firming programs
-
Mature-looking skin
-
Clients seeking non-surgical skin treatments
Program 3: Scar-Appearance and Texture Care
A skin-renewal program for appropriately selected scars and uneven-looking texture.
Recommended applications:
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Suitable surgical scars
-
Localized texture concerns
-
Selected skin imperfections
Recommended for:
-
Professional scar-care protocols
-
Texture-refinement treatments
-
Skin-renewal programs
-
Appropriately assessed clients
Program 4: Eye-Contour Rejuvenation
A precision program for suitable skin around the eye area.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-eye-area skin
-
Lower-eye-area skin
-
Crow’s-feet appearance
-
Brow-area skin
Recommended for:
-
Eye-contour services
-
Mature-looking eye areas
-
Precision facial treatments
-
Trained professional practitioners
Precision Plasma Application for Customized Treatments
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen creates a controlled electrical arc that produces localized thermal effects at the skin’s surface.
| Treatment Approach | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower-Intensity Application | Small areas, initial protocols and suitable delicate zones |
| Moderate Application | General professional skin-tightening treatments |
| Targeted Point Pattern | Localized wrinkles, scars and texture concerns |
| Customized Treatment Pattern | Area-specific protocols based on professional assessment |
The practitioner must maintain appropriate spacing between plasma points and avoid overtreating the same area.
New clients and sensitive treatment zones should begin with conservative parameters.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The precision pen supports professional treatments on selected facial and body areas.
Facial Treatments
-
Forehead
-
Cheeks
-
Upper-lip area
-
Lower face
-
Jawline
-
Other professionally assessed facial zones
Eye-Contour Treatments
-
Suitable upper-eye-area skin
-
Suitable lower-eye-area skin
-
Crow’s-feet area
-
Brow-area skin
-
Other approved surrounding zones
Neck and Body Treatments
-
Suitable neck areas
-
Décolletage
-
Hands
-
Localized scars
-
Selected texture concerns
-
Other professionally assessed skin areas
Professional Skin-Rejuvenation Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected area, skin type, plasma intensity, application pattern and professional protocol.
| Skin Concern | Applicable Treatment | Intended Aesthetic Application |
|---|---|---|
| Fine-line appearance | Precision plasma pattern | Targeted facial rejuvenation |
| Forehead wrinkles | Customized point application | Wrinkle-appearance improvement |
| Crow’s-feet appearance | Conservative eye-area protocol | Eye-contour rejuvenation |
| Loose-looking facial skin | Skin-tightening pattern | Firming and contour support |
| Jawline skin | Targeted plasma treatment | Lower-face rejuvenation |
| Scar appearance | Localized treatment pattern | Texture-refinement support |
| Uneven-looking texture | Customized plasma application | Skin-renewal program |
| Aging-looking hands | Professional hand protocol | Texture and rejuvenation support |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s skin concerns, medical history, previous treatments, healing response, tendency toward pigmentation or scarring and contraindications.
2. Skin Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and prepared according to the professional protocol. An appropriate topical anesthetic may be used where permitted and clinically suitable.
3. Parameter and Pattern Selection
The practitioner selects an appropriate plasma intensity, point spacing, treatment pattern and session duration according to the client’s skin and treatment area.
4. Plasma Treatment
The pen is held at the required distance to create controlled plasma arcs across the selected treatment zone. The practitioner works precisely and avoids excessive overlapping.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the area is assessed and appropriate aftercare instructions are provided.
A typical session may last approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the size and number of treatment areas.
Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, crusting and visible treatment points are expected during healing.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The compact Fibroblast Plasma Pen supports precise operation in qualified professional aesthetic settings.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Controlled plasma-arc technology
-
Precision pen-style applicator
-
Targeted facial and body treatments
-
Adjustable professional parameters
-
Compact and portable design
-
Multiple treatment-tip compatibility
-
Localized treatment control
-
Professional skin-rejuvenation applications
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Fibroblast Plasma Pen |
| Product Type | Professional plasma skin-treatment device |
| Technology | Controlled electrical plasma arc |
| Primary Applications | Skin tightening, fine-line care, scar-appearance and texture-refinement treatments |
| Treatment Areas | Selected areas of the face, eye contour, jawline, neck, hands and body |
| Treatment Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes |
| Operation | Precision point-by-point plasma application |
| Intensity | Adjustable according to the selected device configuration |
| Treatment Tips | Interchangeable professional plasma tips |
| Design | Compact handheld pen |
| Intended Users | Appropriately trained professional operators |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty |
| Support | Professional operating guidance and technical assistance |
What Is Included?
The package includes the plasma pen and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One Fibroblast Plasma Pen
-
Professional plasma treatment tips
-
Tip-installation components
-
Power adapter or charging equipment for the selected model
-
Power cable where applicable
-
Protective storage packaging
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Professional setup guidance
-
Treatment-tip installation
-
Intensity-selection guidance
-
Treatment-pattern guidance
-
Point-spacing instructions
-
Facial and body treatment guidance
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional operating guidance covers:
-
Device setup
-
Treatment-tip installation
-
Intensity selection
-
Plasma-arc control
-
Treatment-point spacing
-
Facial-area mapping
-
Eye-contour precautions
-
Skin-type assessment
-
Client consultation
-
Contraindication screening
-
Post-treatment care
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
The operator must also meet all professional training, qualification and licensing requirements applicable in the intended market.
Three-Year Warranty
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main plasma pen unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Plasma-generation components
-
Intensity-control system
-
Original charging or power components
-
Other eligible components supplied with the device
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Setup guidance for eligible replacement components
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-tip installation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or power connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of treatment tips and consumables
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, device serial information, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen intentionally creates controlled thermal injury at the skin’s surface. It is a professional treatment device and should only be operated by appropriately trained and legally authorized practitioners.
A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active cancer
-
Active herpes simplex
-
Open wounds or active skin infections
-
Severe inflammatory skin conditions
-
Recent surgery
-
Recent laser treatments or chemical peels
-
Recent isotretinoin use
-
Bleeding disorders
-
Poor wound healing
-
A history of abnormal or keloid scarring
-
Higher risk of post-inflammatory pigmentation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Possible treatment responses and complications include:
-
Redness
-
Swelling
-
Tenderness
-
Crusting
-
Temporary treatment marks
-
Pigmentation changes
-
Infection
-
Delayed healing
-
Burns
-
Scarring
Plasma energy must never be applied directly to the eyes, wet eyelid margin, mucous membranes or other prohibited anatomical areas.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Professional aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Qualified skin-care studios
-
Trained plasma practitioners
-
Appropriate healthcare professionals
-
Professional anti-aging centers
-
Clinics offering targeted skin treatments
-
Businesses expanding their advanced aesthetic services
This device is not intended for casual, untrained or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose the Fibroblast Plasma Pen?
Provide Precision Treatments
The compact pen and controlled plasma arc allow trained practitioners to work on localized wrinkles, scars and skin-texture concerns.
Treat Multiple Skin Areas
The system supports professional protocols for selected areas of the face, eye contour, jawline, neck, hands and body.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable intensity, treatment-point spacing and application patterns allow treatments to be adapted to the client’s skin and professional objectives.
Expand Your Service Menu
The device can support professional fine-line, skin-tightening, scar-appearance, eye-contour and texture-refinement services.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year limited warranty, professional operating guidance and technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is a Fibroblast Plasma Pen?
A Fibroblast Plasma Pen creates a controlled electrical arc between the device tip and the skin’s surface. This produces localized thermal effects used in professional aesthetic skin treatments.
How does plasma treatment support skin tightening?
The controlled thermal treatment creates localized skin contraction and initiates a healing response. The appearance of the treated area may continue changing during recovery and remodeling.
Which areas can be treated?
Suitable areas may include the forehead, cheeks, upper-lip area, eye contour, lower face, jawline, neck, hands and selected scars.
How long does a session take?
A typical treatment lasts approximately 30–60 minutes. The exact duration depends on the size and number of treatment areas.
Is plasma pen treatment painless?
No. The procedure can cause heat, stinging or discomfort. An appropriate topical anesthetic may be used by a qualified professional where permitted.
Is there downtime?
Yes. Redness, swelling, tenderness, crusting and visible treatment points may occur. Recovery time varies according to treatment intensity, area and individual healing response.
When may clients notice results?
Some contraction may be visible after treatment, while additional changes may develop during healing. Outcomes and timelines vary between clients.
Are results permanent?
No permanent result should be guaranteed. The natural aging process continues, and maintenance or additional treatment may be required.
Can the device be used on every skin type?
No. Some skin types have a higher risk of pigmentation changes or scarring. Every client requires careful professional skin assessment before treatment.
Can the Plasma Pen be used at home?
No. Plasma treatment creates controlled thermal injury and should only be performed by an appropriately trained and legally authorized professional.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved device components, subject to the official warranty policy. Treatment tips, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Add Precision Plasma Treatments to Your Professional Services
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen combines:
-
Controlled plasma-arc technology
-
Precision point-by-point application
-
Professional facial and body protocols
-
Targeted skin-tightening and texture-refinement services
-
Three-year limited warranty and technical support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the Fibroblast Plasma Pen or receive more information about its professional operation and package contents.
Order Your Fibroblast Plasma Pen and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$550.00
Professional Far-Infrared Heat Therapy System
Adjustable Full-Body Heating for Home Wellness and Professional Spa Treatments
The WikBeauty Infrared Sauna Blanket is a portable far-infrared heat therapy system developed for home wellness users, beauty salons, spas, recovery centers and wellness professionals.
Its dense internal heating-wire design provides consistent heat distribution across the blanket. Adjustable temperature controls allow the system to heat rapidly up to 80°C, supporting personalized relaxation, sweating and recovery-oriented sessions.
The foldable design provides full-body coverage while remaining convenient to operate, store and transport.
Far-infrared heating | Adjustable temperature | Full-body coverage | Three-year warranty
Four Wellness Applications on One Far-Infrared Platform
Relaxation and Stress Relief
The far-infrared heating system surrounds the body with adjustable warmth, creating a comfortable environment for relaxation and stress reduction.
Common applications include:
-
Relaxation sessions
-
Stress-management programs
-
Evening wellness routines
-
Spa relaxation packages
-
Self-care programs
-
General home wellness
Natural Sweating
The adjustable heat supports the body’s natural sweating response during a controlled session.
Common applications include:
-
Sweat-focused wellness sessions
-
General body-care programs
-
Spa wellness packages
-
Post-workout relaxation
-
Personal wellness routines
-
Maintenance-oriented treatments
Circulation and Recovery Support
Far-infrared warmth may support circulation and help relax tired or tense muscles.
Common applications include:
-
Post-workout recovery
-
Tired-muscle relaxation
-
General circulation support
-
Body-warming programs
-
Fatigue-relief sessions
-
Fitness and recovery services
Body and Skin Wellness
The combination of warmth, sweating and relaxation can be incorporated into broader body-care and skin-wellness programs.
Common applications include:
-
Body-wellness packages
-
Skin-care preparation
-
Body-contouring add-on services
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Wellness memberships
-
Personal self-care routines
The appropriate temperature and session duration should be selected according to the user’s comfort, experience and wellness objectives.
Select the Right Treatment Program
The sauna blanket supports adjustable temperature and duration settings for different wellness objectives.
Program 1: Gentle Relaxation
A lower-temperature program designed for first-time users and comfort-focused wellness sessions.
Recommended applications:
-
General relaxation
-
Evening wellness routines
-
First-time heat sessions
-
Stress-reduction programs
Recommended for:
-
New users
-
Home wellness routines
-
Spa relaxation services
-
Clients who prefer gentle warmth
Program 2: Sweat and Wellness
A moderate-temperature program designed to encourage natural sweating and full-body warmth.
Recommended applications:
-
Sweat-focused sessions
-
General wellness programs
-
Body-care packages
-
Personal self-care routines
Recommended for:
-
Wellness centers
-
Beauty salons
-
Spa treatment packages
-
Regular home users
Program 3: Recovery and Relaxation
A customizable heat program intended for post-workout relaxation and tired-muscle support.
Recommended applications:
-
Post-workout sessions
-
Tired-muscle relaxation
-
Fatigue-relief programs
-
General recovery support
Recommended for:
-
Fitness enthusiasts
-
Recovery centers
-
Personal trainers
-
Sports-wellness businesses
Program 4: Professional Wellness Add-On
A full-body heating program that can be added to suitable spa, massage and body-care services.
Recommended applications:
-
Massage packages
-
Body-care programs
-
Spa memberships
-
Wellness-treatment combinations
Recommended for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Professional spas
-
Wellness centers
-
Businesses expanding their treatment menu
Adjustable Heat for Customized Wellness Sessions
The Infrared Sauna Blanket provides adjustable temperature and treatment duration. Each setting should be selected according to user comfort, heat tolerance and wellness objectives.
| Heat Level | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Gentle Heat | First-time use, relaxation and shorter sessions |
| Moderate Heat | General wellness and comfortable sweating |
| Higher Heat | Experienced users seeking more intensive warmth |
| Customized Program | Professional spa packages and personalized home sessions |
The adjustable settings give users greater control over temperature, session intensity and comfort.
New users should begin with a lower temperature and shorter duration before increasing either setting gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Coverage
The blanket provides full-body heating coverage for a comprehensive wellness experience.
Upper-Body Coverage
-
Back
-
Shoulders
-
Arms
-
Torso
-
Stomach
Lower-Body Coverage
-
Hips
-
Buttocks
-
Thighs
-
Lower legs
-
Feet
Full-Body Sessions
-
Relaxation
-
Natural sweating
-
Recovery support
-
General body wellness
-
Home and professional spa programs
Professional and Home Wellness Applications
The available sessions depend on the selected temperature, duration and wellness objective.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Program | Intended Wellness Application |
|---|---|---|
| Full body | Customized heat program | Relaxation and natural sweating |
| Back and shoulders | Gentle or moderate heat | Tired-muscle relaxation |
| Torso and stomach | Moderate heat | Body-wellness support |
| Arms and legs | Customized heat | Full-body warming and relaxation |
| Post-workout body | Recovery program | Muscle-relaxation support |
| Spa clients | Professional add-on program | Wellness-package enhancement |
| Home users | Personal wellness program | Convenient self-care routine |
| Fitness clients | Recovery program | Post-exercise relaxation |
User suitability and individual responses vary. Health conditions and heat sensitivity should be considered before every session.
How a Wellness Session Works
1. User Preparation
The user reviews the operating instructions, confirms suitability and selects a comfortable treatment area. Water should be available before, during and after the session.
2. Blanket Preparation
The sauna blanket is placed on a flat, heat-resistant surface. The digital controller and power cable are connected according to the operating manual.
3. Temperature Selection
The user selects an appropriate temperature and session duration. First-time users should begin with a lower temperature and shorter session.
4. Heat Therapy Session
The user lies comfortably inside the blanket while the dense heating-wire system distributes far-infrared warmth across the body. A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes.
5. Post-Session Care
After the session, the user exits the blanket carefully, allows the body to cool gradually and drinks water to support hydration.
The blanket should be switched off, disconnected and cleaned according to the supplied maintenance instructions.
Designed for Home and Professional Wellness Environments
The Infrared Sauna Blanket combines adjustable far-infrared heating with a foldable, portable design for convenient use.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Far-infrared heating technology
-
Dense internal heating-wire distribution
-
Rapid heating up to 80°C
-
Adjustable temperature settings
-
Digital temperature display
-
Wired and remote-control options
-
Full-body heat coverage
-
Foldable design for convenient storage
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | WikBeauty Infrared Sauna Blanket |
| Product Type | Portable far-infrared heat therapy system |
| Heating Technology | Far-infrared heating with dense wiring |
| Maximum Temperature | Adjustable up to 80°C |
| Coverage Area | Torso, back, stomach, arms and legs |
| Material | Purple soft-fabric exterior |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Suggested Frequency | Up to 3–4 sessions per week according to tolerance |
| Temperature Control | Adjustable settings with digital display |
| Control Method | Wired and remote-control options |
| Voltage Options | 110V and 220V |
| Design | Foldable and portable |
| Use Environments | Home, spas, wellness centers and professional clinics |
| Warranty | Three-year warranty |
| Support | Professional after-sales assistance |
| Certificate | CE Certificate |
What Is Included?
The package includes the sauna blanket, temperature-control equipment and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One WikBeauty Infrared Sauna Blanket
-
One digital temperature controller
-
Remote-control components
-
Power cable for the selected voltage
-
Required connection components
-
English instruction manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Product setup guidance
-
Temperature-control instructions
-
Session-duration guidance
-
Home and professional-use instructions
-
Safety and contraindication information
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Professional Guidance and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Product setup
-
Digital-controller operation
-
Temperature adjustment
-
Session-duration selection
-
Safe blanket positioning
-
Home and professional-use protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety precautions
-
Storage instructions
-
Basic troubleshooting
Three-Year Warranty
The WikBeauty Infrared Sauna Blanket is supported by a three-year warranty, providing long-term protection for your wellness-equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Infrared sauna blanket
-
Internal heating components
-
Digital temperature controller
-
Original remote-control components
-
Power connection components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the product
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Setup guidance for eligible replacement components
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Folding or storing the blanket incorrectly
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of fabric and external materials
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, product serial information, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This sauna blanket produces high temperatures and should only be used according to the supplied operating instructions.
Users should review their health condition and heat tolerance before beginning a session.
The product may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Uncontrolled blood-pressure conditions
-
Fever, acute inflammation or active infection
-
Severe dehydration
-
Reduced heat sensitivity
-
Open wounds, burns or severe skin conditions
-
Recent surgery
-
Conditions affecting normal sweating
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Users should:
-
Drink water before and after each session
-
Begin with a lower temperature
-
Start with a shorter session
-
Avoid using the blanket on broken or irritated skin
-
Remove jewelry and metallic items
-
Use the product in a ventilated room
-
Stop immediately if dizziness, pain or discomfort occurs
-
Allow the body to cool gradually after use
-
Disconnect the blanket before cleaning
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical advice should be obtained whenever user suitability is uncertain.
Intended Home and Professional Users
This product is suitable for:
-
Home wellness users
-
Beauty salons
-
Professional spas
-
Wellness centers
-
Fitness and recovery facilities
-
Massage professionals
-
Personal trainers
-
Hotels and wellness retreats
-
Businesses expanding their wellness services
Users must follow the supplied safety, temperature and operating instructions.
Why Choose the WikBeauty Infrared Sauna Blanket?
Enjoy Wellness at Home
The foldable design provides a convenient full-body heat experience without requiring a permanent sauna installation.
Cover the Full Body
The blanket provides heat coverage across the torso, back, stomach, arms and legs.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable temperature, digital controls and customizable session duration allow users to create a comfortable wellness routine.
Expand Your Professional Services
Spas, wellness centers and recovery businesses can add infrared heat sessions to memberships, treatment packages and relaxation programs.
Protect Your Investment
The product includes a three-year warranty, CE Certificate and professional after-sales support.
Frequently Asked Questions
How does the infrared sauna blanket work?
The blanket uses far-infrared heating elements to distribute adjustable warmth across the body. The heat supports relaxation, natural sweating and a full-body wellness experience.
What temperature does the blanket reach?
The temperature is adjustable and can reach up to 80°C. Users should begin at a lower setting and increase the temperature gradually according to comfort and heat tolerance.
How long does a session take?
A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. First-time users should begin with a shorter session.
How often can the blanket be used?
The suggested frequency is up to 3–4 sessions per week according to individual tolerance. Users should allow sufficient recovery and maintain proper hydration.
Which body areas does it cover?
The blanket provides full-body coverage, including the torso, back, stomach, arms and legs.
Is the treatment uncomfortable?
The temperature is adjustable. Users should select a comfortable heat level and stop immediately if they experience dizziness, pain, breathing difficulty or excessive discomfort.
Can the sauna blanket be used at home?
Yes. Its foldable and portable design is suitable for home wellness use when operated according to the supplied safety and temperature instructions.
Can professional spas use the blanket?
Yes. Spas, wellness centers, recovery facilities and other suitable businesses can include the sauna blanket in professional wellness programs.
How should the blanket be cleaned?
The blanket must be switched off, unplugged and allowed to cool before cleaning. Follow the supplied maintenance instructions and never immerse electrical components in water.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved product components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse, incorrect cleaning and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the product include a CE Certificate?
A CE Certificate is included.
Add Far-Infrared Wellness to Your Routine or Business
The WikBeauty Infrared Sauna Blanket combines:
-
Adjustable far-infrared heating
-
Dense internal heat distribution
-
Portable full-body coverage
-
Home and professional wellness applications
-
Three-year warranty and after-sales support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the Infrared Sauna Blanket or receive more information about its temperature settings, package contents and operating guidance.
Order Your Infrared Sauna Blanket and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$560.00
Professional Lipo Laser Slimming Machine
Non-Invasive Fat Reduction, Body Slimming, and Contouring System
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to support targeted fat reduction, inch loss, and improved body shape without surgery or downtime.
Using 650nm low-level laser therapy, the system delivers controlled red-light energy through multiple laser pads positioned over selected treatment areas. This energy supports the release of stored triglycerides from fat cells as free fatty acids and glycerol, which are then processed naturally by the body.
With an intelligent touchscreen, multiple body applicators, and universal 110V/220V compatibility, the machine is suitable for slimming salons, spas, wellness centers, fitness clinics, and professional aesthetic practices.
650nm Lipo Laser | Multiple Treatment Pads | 20–40-Minute Sessions | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Lipo Laser Fat-Reduction Technology
The machine uses 650nm low-level laser therapy to target localized fat deposits without surgery, needles, or anesthesia. Multiple laser pads deliver controlled energy across the selected treatment area.
Common applications include:
-
Localized fat-reduction treatments
-
Waist and abdominal contouring
-
Arm and thigh slimming
-
Hip, flank, and back shaping
-
Buttock contour refinement
Body Sculpting and Inch-Loss Treatments
The flexible laser-pad system allows operators to position applicators around different body zones. This supports customized slimming programs based on the client’s proportions and treatment objectives.
Common applications include:
-
Waistline definition
-
Abdominal contour improvement
-
Arm and thigh reshaping
-
Hip and flank contouring
-
Multi-area body-sculpting programs
Cellulite and Skin-Quality Support
Lipo laser treatments can be incorporated into professional programs designed to improve the appearance of uneven skin texture while supporting smoother and firmer-looking skin.
Common applications include:
-
Cellulite-appearance reduction
-
Skin-texture improvement
-
Firmness and elasticity support
-
Post-slimming skin conditioning
-
Body-smoothing treatments
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Targeted Fat-Reduction Program
Designed for clients with localized areas of stubborn fat that may be resistant to regular diet and exercise.
Recommended applications: Abdomen, waist, hips, thighs, arms, back, and flanks.
Recommended for: Clients seeking focused treatment of one or two specific body areas.
Complete Body-Contouring Program
A multi-area protocol that uses several laser pads to support balanced body shaping and improved proportions.
Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, thighs and hips, arms and back, or other compatible area combinations.
Recommended for: Clients seeking a more comprehensive body-sculpting course.
Cellulite and Skin-Smoothing Program
A treatment program focused on the appearance of uneven texture, cellulite, and reduced skin firmness.
Recommended applications: Thighs, hips, buttocks, abdomen, and upper arms.
Recommended for: Clients who want smoother-looking skin alongside body-contouring benefits.
Maintenance and Shape-Management Program
A flexible follow-up program designed to support previously achieved contouring results.
Recommended applications: Previously treated body areas requiring periodic maintenance.
Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and want ongoing body-contouring support.
Adjustable Laser and Treatment Settings
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Laser Wavelength | 650nm red light | Supports professional low-level laser body-contouring treatments |
| Treatment Time | Adjustable within the recommended 20–40-minute range | Allows sessions to be adapted to the selected area and protocol |
| Laser Pads | Multiple body applicators | Supports simultaneous treatment of compatible body areas |
| Treatment Area | Single-area or multi-area positioning | Enables targeted and comprehensive body-contouring programs |
| Treatment Course | Approximately 8–12 sessions recommended | Supports progressive results through a structured treatment plan |
| Control Interface | Intelligent touchscreen | Provides convenient treatment selection and operating control |
Treatment settings, session frequency, and pad positioning should be selected according to the client’s assessment, treatment area, comfort, and professional operating protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Upper-Body Areas
Treatment pads can be positioned on suitable upper-body zones where localized fat deposits or reduced definition are present.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Back-fat reduction support
-
Flank shaping
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved upper-body proportions
Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdomen and waist are common areas for professional lipo laser body-contouring programs.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal contouring
-
Waistline slimming
-
Localized inch-loss support
-
Flank and side shaping
-
Improved midsection definition
Lower-Body Areas
Multiple pads can be arranged across compatible lower-body treatment zones.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Inner- and outer-thigh contouring
-
Hip shaping
-
Buttock contour refinement
-
Cellulite-appearance improvement
-
Smoother-looking lower-body contours
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Application | Primary Area | Professional Objective |
|---|---|---|
| Abdominal Slimming | Abdomen | Support localized fat reduction and improved abdominal contour |
| Waistline Contouring | Waist and flanks | Create a more defined waistline |
| Arm Slimming | Upper arms | Improve arm shape and reduce the appearance of localized fullness |
| Thigh Contouring | Inner and outer thighs | Support smoother and more balanced leg contours |
| Hip Shaping | Hips | Improve overall body proportions |
| Back Contouring | Upper and lower back | Target localized fat deposits and improve back definition |
| Buttock Contouring | Buttocks | Refine shape and improve surrounding contours |
| Cellulite Care | Thighs, hips, and buttocks | Improve the appearance of uneven skin texture |
| Skin-Firming Support | Multiple body areas | Support smoother and firmer-looking skin |
| Multi-Area Sculpting | Combined body zones | Deliver a customized body-contouring program |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s treatment goals, medical history, lifestyle, current body condition, and potential contraindications.
Step 2: Body Assessment
Identify suitable treatment areas, document measurements when required, and create a personalized treatment plan.
Step 3: Laser-Pad Placement
Position the laser pads securely over the selected treatment areas according to the operating protocol.
Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the appropriate treatment time and operating settings using the intelligent touchscreen interface. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes.
Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated area, and provide suitable hydration, nutrition, activity, and treatment-course guidance.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine combines a straightforward operating system with flexible applicator placement, making it suitable for a variety of professional body-contouring businesses.
Key advantages include:
-
Non-invasive treatment technology
-
Multiple laser pads for flexible positioning
-
Intelligent touchscreen operation
-
Single-area and multi-area treatment capability
-
Approximately 20–40-minute sessions
-
No surgical recovery period
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
Professional training and after-sales support
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year warranty
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine |
| Technology | Low-Level Laser Therapy |
| Laser Wavelength | 650nm red light |
| Primary Functions | Fat reduction, body slimming, body contouring, cellulite care, and skin-tightening support |
| Applicators | Multiple laser pads for different body areas |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, hips, back, flanks, and buttocks |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Approximately 8–12 sessions |
| Display and Controls | Intelligent touchscreen interface |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V dual compatibility |
| Certificates | CE and ISO |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| After-Sales Service | Professional training and technical support |
Treatment experiences and visible outcomes may vary according to the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment area, treatment frequency, and adherence to the recommended course. Results should not be presented as guaranteed.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine
-
Multiple laser-pad body applicators
-
1 × Compatible power cable
-
1 × Warranty card
-
Standard accessories required for machine operation
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Operating instructions
-
Laser-pad placement guidance
-
Treatment protocol training
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
After-sales technical support
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help owners and treatment providers use the machine confidently and consistently.
Training and support cover:
-
Machine installation and initial setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Laser-pad positioning
-
Treatment-area selection
-
Session configuration
-
Client assessment procedures
-
Safety and contraindication screening
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Troubleshooting assistance
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
Ongoing after-sales support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults under normal operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair instructions are issued.
Warranty support includes:
-
Remote technical diagnosis
-
Operating and troubleshooting assistance
-
Support for eligible replacement parts
-
Repair guidance
-
Maintenance recommendations
-
After-sales communication throughout the warranty period
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty support team with the machine model and order information.
-
Provide a clear description of the issue.
-
Submit photos or a short video when requested.
-
Allow the technical team to diagnose the machine.
-
Follow the provided troubleshooting or repair instructions.
-
Receive eligible replacement-part support when required.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by:
-
Incorrect operation
-
Unauthorized modification or repair
-
Accidental impact or physical damage
-
Improper voltage or electrical installation
-
Water damage or unsuitable storage conditions
-
Failure to follow maintenance instructions
-
Normal wear of consumable components
-
Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and contraindication screening should be completed before treatment. The machine should be operated only by trained users following the supplied instructions and applicable local requirements.
Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment
-
Severe liver or kidney conditions
-
Uncontrolled diabetes
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds or damaged skin in the treatment area
-
Recent surgery in the intended treatment area
-
Photosensitivity or use of photosensitizing medication
-
Any medical condition requiring professional clearance
Clients with medical concerns should consult a qualified healthcare professional before treatment.
Operating Precautions
-
Complete a client consultation before every initial treatment.
-
Inspect the machine, cables, and laser pads before use.
-
Clean and disinfect applicators according to the manual.
-
Position laser pads securely without excessive pressure.
-
Do not apply pads over open wounds or inflamed skin.
-
Do not exceed the recommended treatment time.
-
Monitor client comfort throughout the session.
-
Stop treatment if the client experiences an unexpected reaction.
-
Keep the machine away from excessive moisture and heat.
-
Use a stable and correctly grounded power supply.
-
Follow the recommended cleaning and maintenance schedule.
-
Keep accurate treatment records when required.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine is suitable for:
-
Body-slimming salons
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Wellness centers
-
Day spas and medical spas
-
Fitness and body-transformation centers
-
Weight-management businesses
-
Professional body-contouring providers
Users must follow the supplied operating instructions, complete appropriate training, and comply with local regulations governing aesthetic equipment.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine?
1. Professional 650nm Lipo Laser Technology
The system uses 650nm low-level laser therapy to support non-invasive fat-reduction and body-contouring treatments.
2. Multiple Laser-Pad Applicators
Flexible pad placement allows professionals to target different body areas and create customized treatment programs.
3. Non-Invasive Client Experience
Treatments require no surgery, needles, anesthesia, or extended recovery period, making the service convenient for suitable clients.
4. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating guidance, treatment training, technical assistance, and after-sales support.
5. Three-Year Warranty and Certified Quality
The system includes a three-year professional warranty and is supplied with CE and ISO certificates.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine work?
The system uses 650nm low-level laser energy delivered through body applicators. The treatment supports the release of stored triglycerides from fat cells into free fatty acids and glycerol, which are processed naturally by the body.
Q: Is the treatment invasive?
No. Lipo laser is a non-invasive body-contouring treatment that does not require surgery, injections, or anesthesia.
Q: Is the treatment painful?
Most clients describe the treatment as comfortable and relaxing. Individual sensitivity can vary, so client comfort should be monitored throughout every session.
Q: How long does one session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, depending on the treatment area and selected protocol.
Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A complete course generally includes approximately 8–12 sessions. The final recommendation should be based on the client’s assessment and treatment objectives.
Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice changes after the first few sessions, while more developed results usually require completion of the recommended treatment course. Individual outcomes vary.
Q: Which body areas can be treated?
Compatible areas include the abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, hips, back, flanks, and buttocks.
Q: Can multiple areas be treated during one session?
The multiple-pad system supports simultaneous placement across compatible treatment zones. Operators must follow the recommended pad arrangement and treatment protocol.
Q: Is there any downtime?
Lipo laser treatments generally do not require a surgical recovery period. Suitable clients can normally return to their usual activities after treatment.
Q: Can the machine help improve the appearance of cellulite?
The system can be incorporated into professional programs designed to improve body contours and the appearance of uneven skin texture.
Q: Does the machine provide skin-tightening benefits?
Treatments can support smoother and firmer-looking skin as part of a structured body-contouring program.
Q: Are lipo laser results permanent?
Results depend on the client’s lifestyle, nutrition, physical activity, treatment course, and weight stability. The service should not be marketed as guaranteeing permanent fat loss.
Q: What should clients do after treatment?
Clients are generally advised to remain hydrated, maintain balanced nutrition, and follow appropriate activity and aftercare guidance provided by the treatment professional.
Q: Is the machine suitable for every client?
No. Every client should complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment.
Q: Can the machine be used on all skin types?
Low-level laser therapy may be suitable for a broad range of skin types, but individual assessment and contraindication screening remain necessary.
Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility.
Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates.
Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Professional setup, operating, treatment-protocol, safety, and maintenance guidance are included.
Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support.
Q: What is included with the machine?
The package includes the main machine, multiple laser-pad applicators, a compatible power cable, a user manual and training guide, a warranty card, and standard operating accessories.
Add Professional Lipo Laser Slimming to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine gives salons, spas, wellness centers, and aesthetic clinics a versatile solution for non-invasive fat reduction, body contouring, cellulite care, and skin-quality treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
Professional 650nm low-level laser technology
-
Multiple pads for flexible body-area treatment
-
Non-invasive 20–40-minute sessions
-
Intelligent touchscreen operation
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support.
Receives in 8 days.
$999.00
Professional RF Microneedling Device
Controlled-Depth Skin Rejuvenation, Collagen Remodeling, and Tightening System
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device is a professional skin-rejuvenation system combining controlled-depth microneedling with radiofrequency energy.
Adjustable microneedles penetrate the skin at depths from 0.5mm to 4.0mm while delivering controlled RF energy into the targeted tissue. This dual action supports the skin’s natural renewal response and stimulates collagen and elastin remodeling.
With four interchangeable cartridge options, adjustable RF intensity, intelligent touchscreen controls, and both facial and body applications, the system is designed for dermatology practices, medical spas, and advanced aesthetic clinics operating within local professional requirements.
Microneedling and RF | 0.5–4.0mm Adjustable Depth | Four Cartridge Options | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform
Controlled-Depth Microneedling
The device creates controlled microchannels at carefully selected depths. This process supports the skin’s natural repair response and encourages collagen and elastin production.
Common applications include:
-
Fine-line and wrinkle treatments
-
Acne-scar improvement
-
Surgical-scar treatments
-
Stretch-mark improvement
-
Enlarged-pore care
-
Skin-texture refinement
Radiofrequency Dermal Heating
RF energy is delivered through the microneedles into the selected tissue depth. This controlled thermal action supports deeper collagen remodeling while limiting unnecessary surface exposure.
Common applications include:
-
Skin-tightening treatments
-
Collagen-remodeling programs
-
Firmness and elasticity support
-
Facial and neck rejuvenation
-
Texture improvement
-
Body skin-firming treatments
Interchangeable Cartridge Technology
Four cartridge configurations allow professionals to adapt treatments to delicate facial zones, complete facial areas, the neck and décolleté, or larger body regions.
Common applications include:
-
Precision under-eye treatments
-
Full-face rejuvenation
-
Face and neck protocols
-
Décolleté treatments
-
Abdominal stretch-mark care
-
Thigh and arm rejuvenation
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Anti-Aging and Skin-Tightening Program
A professional facial-rejuvenation protocol designed to address fine lines, wrinkles, reduced elasticity, and skin laxity.
Recommended applications: Face, jawline, neck, and décolleté.
Recommended for: Suitable clients seeking improved firmness, smoother-looking skin, and progressive collagen remodeling.
Scar and Texture-Refinement Program
A customized microneedling and RF protocol developed to improve the appearance of acne scars, selected surgical scars, and uneven texture.
Recommended applications: Face and compatible body areas containing fully healed scars.
Recommended for: Clients seeking gradual improvement in scar appearance, texture, and overall skin smoothness.
Stretch-Mark and Body-Rejuvenation Program
A larger-area protocol using the appropriate cartridge and needle depth for body skin concerns.
Recommended applications: Abdomen, thighs, and upper arms.
Recommended for: Clients seeking improvement in the appearance of stretch marks, uneven body texture, or reduced skin firmness.
Maintenance and Collagen-Support Program
A follow-up treatment designed to support previously achieved rejuvenation results and continued collagen stimulation.
Recommended applications: Previously treated facial or body areas.
Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and require periodic maintenance based on professional assessment.
Adjustable Needle Depth and RF Treatment Settings
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Needle Depth | Adjustable from 0.5mm to 4.0mm | Adapts penetration to the skin concern, treatment area, and professional protocol |
| RF Intensity | Adjustable energy control | Customizes thermal delivery according to skin condition and tolerance |
| 10-Pin Cartridge | Precision cartridge | Treats small and delicate facial areas |
| 25-Pin Cartridge | Standard facial cartridge | Supports complete facial rejuvenation |
| 36-Pin Cartridge | Extended-coverage cartridge | Treats the face, neck, and décolleté efficiently |
| 49-Pin Cartridge | Large-area body cartridge | Supports stretch-mark and body-rejuvenation treatments |
| Treatment Time | Approximately 20–40 minutes | Allows sessions to be adapted to the treatment area |
| Treatment Course | Approximately 3–6 sessions | Supports progressive collagen remodeling |
| Session Interval | Approximately 4–6 weeks | Allows suitable skin-recovery time between treatments |
| Control Interface | Intelligent touchscreen | Provides convenient depth, intensity, and program control |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V compatibility | Supports use in different international markets |
Needle depth and RF intensity must be selected according to the client’s skin condition, treatment area, sensitivity, medical history, and applicable professional protocol. Deeper settings are not automatically better and should only be used when clinically appropriate.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Facial Areas
The 10-pin and 25-pin cartridges support precision and full-face treatments across suitable facial zones.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Fine-line reduction
-
Wrinkle improvement
-
Acne-scar care
-
Enlarged-pore refinement
-
Skin-texture improvement
-
Firmness and elasticity support
-
More even-looking skin tone
Neck and Décolleté Areas
The 25-pin or 36-pin cartridge can support carefully controlled treatments across suitable neck and upper-chest areas.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Neck-line improvement
-
Skin-firming support
-
Décolleté rejuvenation
-
Texture refinement
-
Collagen stimulation
-
Improved elasticity
Body Areas
The 36-pin and 49-pin cartridges provide wider coverage for compatible body-treatment zones.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Stretch-mark improvement
-
Abdominal skin rejuvenation
-
Thigh-texture refinement
-
Upper-arm firming
-
Selected scar treatments
-
Smoother-looking body skin
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Application | Primary Area | Professional Objective |
|---|---|---|
| Fine-Line Treatment | Face and eye contour | Improve the appearance of superficial lines |
| Wrinkle Reduction | Face and neck | Support collagen remodeling and smoother-looking skin |
| Acne-Scar Care | Face | Improve the appearance of fully healed acne scars |
| Surgical-Scar Care | Suitable healed scars | Support gradual texture remodeling |
| Skin Tightening | Face, neck, abdomen, and arms | Improve the appearance of firmness and elasticity |
| Pore Refinement | Face | Reduce the visible appearance of enlarged pores |
| Texture Improvement | Face and body | Support smoother and more even-looking skin |
| Stretch-Mark Care | Abdomen, thighs, and arms | Improve the appearance of stretch marks |
| Décolleté Rejuvenation | Upper chest | Address texture, lines, and reduced firmness |
| Collagen Maintenance | Previously treated areas | Support ongoing skin-renewal programs |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s skin concerns, medical history, medications, previous procedures, healing response, sun exposure, and possible contraindications.
Step 2: Skin Assessment
Evaluate skin type, treatment area, concern severity, sensitivity, and suitability. Select the appropriate cartridge, needle depth, RF intensity, and treatment pattern.
Step 3: Skin Preparation
Cleanse and disinfect the treatment area according to clinical protocol. Apply a suitable topical anesthetic when professionally indicated and permitted, then remove it completely before treatment.
Step 4: Controlled RF Microneedling Treatment
Install a new sterile cartridge, confirm the selected settings, and perform the treatment using consistent passes and controlled coverage. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes.
Step 5: Post-Treatment Care
Apply professionally appropriate post-treatment products and provide written aftercare instructions covering sun protection, cleansing, hydration, skincare restrictions, and expected temporary reactions.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device combines adjustable depth, controlled RF intensity, four cartridge options, and intelligent operation for professional skin-rejuvenation services.
Key advantages include:
-
Combined microneedling and RF technology
-
Adjustable 0.5–4.0mm needle depth
-
Adjustable radiofrequency intensity
-
Four interchangeable cartridge configurations
-
Precision facial and larger body applications
-
Approximately 20–40-minute sessions
-
Structured 3–6-session treatment courses
-
Intelligent touchscreen operation
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
Professional training and after-sales support
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device |
| Technology | Controlled-depth microneedling and radiofrequency energy |
| Needle-Depth Range | Adjustable from 0.5mm to 4.0mm |
| RF Energy | Adjustable intensity control |
| Cartridge Options | 10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin |
| 10-Pin Application | Under-eye area, nose, mouth area, small scars, and precision treatments |
| 25-Pin Application | Standard full-face rejuvenation and wrinkle treatments |
| 36-Pin Application | Face, neck, décolleté, and extended treatment zones |
| 49-Pin Application | Abdomen, thighs, arms, stretch marks, and larger body areas |
| Treatment Areas | Face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and arms |
| Primary Functions | Skin rejuvenation, wrinkle reduction, scar care, stretch-mark improvement, skin tightening, pore refinement, and texture improvement |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Approximately 3–6 sessions |
| Recommended Interval | Approximately 4–6 weeks |
| Expected Downtime | Commonly 1–2 days of temporary redness or swelling |
| Results Duration | Supplied estimate of approximately 12–18 months with suitable maintenance |
| Display and Controls | Intelligent touchscreen interface |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V dual compatibility |
| Certificates | CE and ISO |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| After-Sales Service | Professional training and technical support |
Treatment response, downtime, improvement timeline, and result duration vary according to skin condition, age, treatment depth, RF intensity, treatment course, healing response, lifestyle, sun exposure, and aftercare compliance. Results should not be presented as guaranteed.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device
-
Compatible professional treatment handpiece
-
Multiple interchangeable needle cartridges
-
10-pin cartridge configuration
-
25-pin cartridge configuration
-
36-pin cartridge configuration
-
49-pin cartridge configuration
-
1 × Compatible power cable
-
Standard operating accessories
-
1 × Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Machine setup guide
-
Touchscreen operating instructions
-
Cartridge-selection guidance
-
Needle-depth guidance
-
RF-setting guidance
-
Treatment-protocol information
-
Contraindication and safety instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional operator training
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help qualified users understand the machine’s setup, treatment settings, cartridge selection, and maintenance requirements.
Training and support cover:
-
Machine installation and initial setup
-
Intelligent touchscreen operation
-
Treatment-handpiece preparation
-
Sterile cartridge installation
-
Cartridge selection by treatment area
-
Needle-depth adjustment
-
RF-intensity selection
-
Treatment-pattern guidance
-
Client consultation and skin assessment
-
Contraindication screening
-
Infection-control procedures
-
Post-treatment care
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Troubleshooting assistance
Training supplied with the machine does not replace any professional license, medical supervision, infection-control qualification, or legal authorization required in the operator’s location.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising under normal professional operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before repair guidance or replacement parts are supplied.
Warranty support includes:
-
Remote technical diagnosis
-
Operating and troubleshooting assistance
-
Support for eligible replacement parts
-
Repair instructions
-
Maintenance recommendations
-
After-sales communication during the warranty period
Technical Support Process
-
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information.
-
Provide a detailed description of the technical problem.
-
Submit clear photographs or a short video when requested.
-
Allow the technical team to diagnose the issue.
-
Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions.
-
Receive eligible replacement-part support when required.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by:
-
Incorrect operation or treatment setup
-
Unauthorized modification or repair
-
Accidental impact or physical damage
-
Improper voltage or electrical installation
-
Liquid damage or unsuitable storage
-
Failure to follow cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Use of incompatible cartridges or accessories
-
Normal wear of handpieces, cables, and consumable components
-
Used or disposable needle cartridges
-
Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery
Safety and Contraindications
RF microneedling is a professional procedure requiring appropriate training, infection-control practices, and compliance with local licensing or medical-supervision requirements.
Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with:
-
Active skin infection
-
Herpes outbreak
-
Open wounds or sores
-
Active inflammation in the treatment area
-
Recent sunburn or excessive sun exposure
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Severe keloid-scarring tendency
-
Blood-clotting or bleeding disorders
-
Current anticoagulant treatment without medical clearance
-
Autoimmune conditions affecting healing
-
Uncontrolled diabetes
-
Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment
-
Recent isotretinoin use
-
Reduced skin sensation
-
Poor wound-healing history
-
Recent injectable or surgical treatment in the area
-
Any condition requiring professional medical clearance
A waiting period of approximately 6–12 months after isotretinoin use may be appropriate, but the client must follow the advice of their prescribing healthcare professional.
Operating Precautions
-
Complete a detailed consultation and skin assessment.
-
Confirm the operator is legally permitted to perform RF microneedling.
-
Obtain informed consent before treatment.
-
Document the client’s medical history and current medications.
-
Examine the skin for infection, wounds, irritation, and recent sun exposure.
-
Use a new, sterile, single-use needle cartridge for every client and session.
-
Never reuse disposable needle cartridges.
-
Clean and disinfect the handpiece and treatment environment properly.
-
Select needle depth according to the treatment area and concern.
-
Adjust RF intensity according to skin response and tolerance.
-
Do not assume that deeper penetration produces better results.
-
Monitor the skin continuously during treatment.
-
Stop treatment if an unexpected reaction occurs.
-
Avoid overlapping passes beyond the professional protocol.
-
Follow appropriate sharps-disposal procedures.
-
Provide complete written aftercare guidance.
-
Maintain accurate treatment records.
-
Follow all local infection-control and clinical-waste requirements.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device is intended for appropriately qualified users, which may include:
-
Dermatology practices
-
Medical spas
-
Aesthetic medical clinics
-
Licensed healthcare professionals
-
Physicians
-
Qualified nurses or nurse practitioners
-
Properly trained aesthetic practitioners under required supervision
-
Advanced beauty clinics where legally permitted
Licensing, supervision, insurance, and scope-of-practice requirements vary by location. Buyers and operators are responsible for confirming all applicable local requirements before providing treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device?
1. Combined Microneedling and RF Technology
The system combines controlled micro-injury with targeted RF energy to support both surface renewal and deeper collagen remodeling.
2. Adjustable 0.5–4.0mm Needle Depth
Variable penetration enables qualified professionals to adapt treatments to different skin concerns, areas, and protocols.
3. Four Specialized Cartridge Options
The 10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin configurations support precision facial work, full-face rejuvenation, extended areas, and body treatments.
4. Facial and Body Treatment Capability
One platform supports treatments for the face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and upper arms.
5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The device includes CE and ISO certificates, professional operating guidance, technical support, and a three-year warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does RF microneedling work?
The device inserts microneedles at a controlled depth while delivering RF energy into the targeted tissue. Microneedling supports the skin’s natural repair response, while RF heating promotes deeper collagen and elastin remodeling.
Q: How is RF microneedling different from standard microneedling?
Standard microneedling creates controlled microchannels. RF microneedling adds thermal energy at the selected tissue depth, providing an additional collagen-remodeling and skin-firming action.
Q: What needle depths are available?
The needle depth is adjustable from approximately 0.5mm to 4.0mm.
Q: Is the same needle depth used for every treatment?
No. Depth must be selected according to the treatment area, skin thickness, concern, client sensitivity, and professional protocol.
Q: Which cartridges are included?
The system includes 10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin cartridge options.
Q: What is the 10-pin cartridge used for?
The 10-pin cartridge supports precise treatment of small or delicate areas, including selected under-eye, nose, mouth, and small-scar applications.
Q: What is the 25-pin cartridge used for?
The 25-pin cartridge is designed for standard full-face rejuvenation, wrinkle care, skin tightening, and general texture improvement.
Q: What is the 36-pin cartridge used for?
The 36-pin cartridge provides wider coverage for the face, neck, décolleté, and other extended treatment zones.
Q: What is the 49-pin cartridge used for?
The 49-pin cartridge supports larger body areas such as the abdomen, thighs, and upper arms, including stretch-mark treatments.
Q: Which skin concerns can the machine address?
Professional applications include fine lines, wrinkles, acne scars, selected surgical scars, stretch marks, enlarged pores, reduced firmness, and uneven texture.
Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible areas include the face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and upper arms.
Q: How long does a session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, excluding consultation, cleansing, and topical-anesthetic time.
Q: Is topical anesthetic required?
A topical anesthetic may be used when professionally appropriate and legally permitted. The operator must follow the product instructions and local requirements.
Q: Is the treatment painful?
Client experience varies. With suitable preparation and correctly selected settings, most clients describe temporary pressure, warmth, or prickling rather than severe pain.
Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A typical starting course includes approximately 3–6 sessions.
Q: How far apart should treatments be scheduled?
Sessions are commonly spaced approximately 4–6 weeks apart to allow the skin to recover and remodel.
Q: Is there downtime?
Temporary redness, sensitivity, or mild swelling may last approximately 1–2 days. Recovery varies according to the treatment depth, RF intensity, area, and individual response.
Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients notice early texture improvements after initial sessions. Collagen remodeling develops gradually, with more visible changes commonly appearing over several weeks.
Q: How long can results last?
The supplied estimate is approximately 12–18 months with suitable skincare and maintenance. Individual result duration varies.
Q: Is RF microneedling suitable for every skin tone?
Adjustable settings may allow trained professionals to treat a broad range of skin tones. However, suitability and settings must be determined through an individual assessment.
Q: Can active acne be treated?
Treatment should not be performed over active infection, open lesions, or significant inflammation. The client should be assessed by an appropriately qualified professional.
Q: Can the device be used on scars?
It can support treatments for fully healed acne scars and selected surgical scars. Active wounds and incompletely healed tissue must not be treated.
Q: Are cartridges reusable?
Needle cartridges should be sterile and single-use. A new cartridge must be used for every client and every treatment session.
Q: What aftercare is recommended?
Clients should follow the professional aftercare plan, use broad-spectrum SPF 30 or higher, avoid harsh skincare for approximately 3–5 days, and avoid swimming, saunas, and excessive heat for at least 48 hours.
Q: Who can operate the device?
The operator must have the qualifications, training, licensing, supervision, and insurance required in the location where treatments are provided.
Q: Does training come with the machine?
Yes. Professional machine-operation and treatment guidance are included. This training does not replace legally required clinical qualifications or licenses.
Q: What certificates are included?
The device is supplied with CE and ISO certificates.
Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support.
Add Professional RF Microneedling to Your Clinic
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device provides qualified clinics and aesthetic professionals with an adjustable platform for skin rejuvenation, collagen remodeling, wrinkle care, scar improvement, stretch-mark treatments, and skin tightening.
Five key benefits:
-
Combined microneedling and radiofrequency technology
-
Adjustable needle depth from 0.5mm to 4.0mm
-
Four interchangeable cartridge configurations
-
Facial, neck, décolleté, and body applications
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, professional training details, and technical support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,599.00
Professional RF Microneedling and Skin-Remodeling System
Fractional Radiofrequency Technology for Skin Tightening, Collagen Stimulation, and Body Contouring
The Morpheus 8 is a professional fractional radiofrequency microneedling system developed for facial rejuvenation, skin tightening, texture improvement, scar treatments, and body-contouring programs.
The system combines precision microneedling with controlled radiofrequency energy. Microneedles create fractional microchannels while delivering RF energy into selected tissue depths, supporting collagen and elastin remodeling below the skin’s surface.
With a 500W maximum power output, adjustable 0.2–7.0mm needle depth, four cartridge options, and a 10.4-inch control screen, the system can be customized for delicate facial areas, deeper facial treatments, and larger body areas.
Fractional RF microneedling | 0.2–7.0mm adjustable depth | Four cartridge options | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies on One Platform
Fractional Microneedling
Precision-engineered needle cartridges create controlled microchannels within the selected treatment area. This fractional process supports the skin’s natural renewal response while leaving surrounding tissue untreated.
Common applications include:
-
Fine-line treatments
-
Wrinkle-reduction programs
-
Enlarged-pore treatments
-
Uneven skin-texture improvement
-
Acne-scar treatments
-
General facial rejuvenation
-
Body skin-renewal programs
Radiofrequency Energy
The system delivers controlled radiofrequency energy through the microneedles and into the targeted tissue depth. This creates a thermal response designed to support collagen contraction and progressive tissue remodeling.
Common applications include:
-
Skin-tightening treatments
-
Collagen-remodeling programs
-
Facial-laxity improvement
-
Jawline and lower-face contouring
-
Neck rejuvenation
-
Body skin-firming treatments
-
Subdermal tissue-remodeling programs
Subdermal Adipose Remodeling
Adjustable needle penetration allows practitioners to work at different tissue depths according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
Deeper treatments may be incorporated into subdermal adipose remodeling programs for selected areas where clients are concerned about mild localized fullness, reduced definition, or loose-looking skin.
Common applications include:
-
Submental-area contouring
-
Lower-face and jowl definition
-
Abdominal contouring
-
Thigh treatments
-
Buttock skin-firming programs
-
Body texture improvement
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Facial Rejuvenation Program
Designed to address common signs of aging and uneven facial texture with customized needle depth and RF intensity.
Recommended applications:
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Enlarged pores
-
Uneven skin texture
-
Reduced skin firmness
-
General collagen-remodeling treatments
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking non-surgical facial rejuvenation
-
Clients concerned about early signs of aging
-
Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement
Skin-Tightening Program
Focuses on areas affected by reduced firmness, laxity, or weakened facial definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Lower-face laxity
-
Jawline definition
-
Neck tightening
-
Jowl-area treatment
-
Mildly loose-looking skin
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking firmer-looking skin
-
Clients concerned about facial contours
-
Clients interested in non-surgical tightening programs
Scar and Texture Program
Combines fractional microneedling and controlled RF energy to support progressive remodeling of uneven or scarred tissue.
Recommended applications:
-
Acne scars
-
Uneven surface texture
-
Enlarged pores
-
Irregular skin appearance
-
Selected body scars
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable acne scarring
-
Clients seeking smoother-looking skin
-
Clients requiring a structured multi-session program
Body-Remodeling Program
Uses deeper adjustable settings and suitable cartridges for larger treatment areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal skin tightening
-
Thigh texture improvement
-
Buttock skin-firming treatments
-
Bra-line and décolletage treatments
-
Selected body-contouring programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about loose-looking body skin
-
Clients seeking improved body texture
-
Clients suitable for deeper RF microneedling protocols
Four Interchangeable Cartridge Options
The system includes four cartridge configurations, allowing practitioners to select the appropriate coverage, penetration pattern, and treatment precision.
| Cartridge | Treatment Purpose | Recommended Areas |
|---|---|---|
| 12-Pin Cartridge | Precise, concentrated treatment | Small facial areas, scars, and detailed treatments |
| 24-Pin Cartridge | Balanced facial coverage | Face, jawline, neck, and general rejuvenation |
| 40-Pin Cartridge | Wider treatment coverage | Larger facial zones and body areas |
| Nano Cartridge | Superficial, non-needle skin treatment | Delicate areas and surface-level skin programs |
Cartridge selection should be based on the treatment area, client condition, desired penetration depth, and professional protocol.
Adjustable Needle Depth for Precise Treatment
Needle depth can be adjusted from 0.2mm to 7.0mm, enabling practitioners to tailor treatments for different facial and body areas.
| Depth Range | General Treatment Level | Possible Applications |
|---|---|---|
| 0.2–0.5mm | Superficial | Surface texture and delicate areas |
| 0.5–1.5mm | Light facial treatment | Fine lines, pores, and general rejuvenation |
| 1.5–3.0mm | Medium-depth treatment | Texture, scars, tightening, and collagen remodeling |
| 3.0–4.0mm | Deep facial or body treatment | Lower-face, neck, and selected body applications |
| 4.0–7.0mm | Deeper body treatment | Subdermal and larger body-area protocols |
These ranges are general references only. Actual settings must be selected by a trained professional following client assessment and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Face and Eye Area
Shallower settings and appropriate cartridges can be selected for delicate or detailed facial treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Fine-line reduction
-
Under-eye skin rejuvenation
-
Pore refinement
-
Texture improvement
-
Facial collagen stimulation
Lower Face, Jawline, and Neck
Customized medium or deeper settings can support tightening and contour-enhancement programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Lower-face tightening
-
Jowl-area improvement
-
Jawline definition
-
Submental contouring
-
Neck skin rejuvenation
Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
Deeper settings and wider cartridges can be selected for larger body treatment areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal skin tightening
-
Thigh texture improvement
-
Buttock skin-firming treatments
-
Body collagen remodeling
-
Selected subdermal contouring programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Suitable Program |
|---|---|---|
| Under-Eye Area | Delicate texture and fine-line improvement | Facial rejuvenation |
| Face | Collagen stimulation, pore refinement, and wrinkle treatment | Facial rejuvenation |
| Acne Scars | Progressive scar and texture remodeling | Scar and texture |
| Lower Face and Jowls | Tightening and contour improvement | Skin tightening |
| Jawline | Definition and submental-area treatment | Skin tightening |
| Neck and Décolletage | Firming and texture improvement | Facial or body remodeling |
| Abdomen | Skin tightening and subdermal remodeling | Body remodeling |
| Thighs | Texture improvement and firming | Body remodeling |
| Buttocks | Skin-quality and firmness improvement | Body remodeling |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, skin condition, treatment concerns, previous procedures, medications, and possible contraindications. Establish realistic treatment objectives and obtain informed consent.
Step 2: Skin Preparation
Clean and disinfect the treatment area according to professional hygiene protocols. Apply topical numbing cream when appropriate and remove it completely before beginning treatment.
Step 3: Cartridge and Setting Selection
Choose the correct cartridge, needle depth, RF frequency, energy level, and treatment pattern according to the client’s skin condition and selected treatment area.
Step 4: Fractional RF Microneedling Treatment
Move the handpiece systematically across the selected area. The microneedles create fractional microchannels while delivering controlled RF energy at the chosen depth.
Step 5: Post-Treatment Care
Complete the treatment according to protocol, inspect the treated area, and provide appropriate aftercare instructions. Recommend gentle skincare and suitable sun protection during recovery.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Morpheus 8 combines customizable treatment settings with professional facial and body applications.
Key advantages include:
-
Fractional microneedling and RF energy on one platform
-
Adjustable 0.2–7.0mm needle depth
-
Four interchangeable cartridge options
-
500W maximum output power
-
Adjustable 1–15MHz RF frequency
-
Dedicated 6MHz Thermagica mode
-
10.4-inch control screen
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Multiple treatment-area sizes
-
Compact 13.3kg professional system
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year parts warranty
-
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine |
| Technology | Fractional radiofrequency microneedling |
| Maximum Output Power | 500W |
| RF Frequency—Microneedling | 1–15MHz adjustable |
| RF Frequency—Thermagica | 6MHz |
| Needle Cartridges | 12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin, and Nano |
| Adjustable Needle Depth | 0.2–7.0mm |
| Treatment-Area Sizes | 1.1 × 1.1cm, 1.6 × 1.6cm, 1.6 × 1.5cm, and 2 × 2cm |
| Display | 10.4-inch control screen |
| Input Voltage | 100V, 110V, or 220V |
| Machine Dimensions | 40 × 36 × 81cm |
| Machine Weight | 13.3kg |
| Package Dimensions | 49 × 46 × 102cm |
| Package Weight | 28.4kg |
| Treatment Areas | Face, eyes, jawline, neck, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and décolletage |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Morpheus 8 main machine
-
1 × RF microneedling treatment handpiece
-
1 × Thermagica treatment handpiece or applicable system attachment
-
12-pin cartridge configuration
-
24-pin cartridge configuration
-
40-pin cartridge configuration
-
Nano cartridge configuration
-
1 × Universal or region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
The final cartridge quantities and package configuration should follow the selected order.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Cartridge-selection guidance
-
Needle-depth protocol guidance
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Body treatment protocols
-
Client consultation materials
-
Aftercare guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Morpheus 8 system includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the machine safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Control-screen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Skin assessment
-
Cartridge selection
-
Needle-depth adjustment
-
RF frequency and energy selection
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Body treatment protocols
-
Treatment hygiene and cartridge handling
-
Post-treatment care
-
Machine cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Morpheus 8 includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Consumable cartridges and components subject to normal wear are not included unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover consumable cartridges, normal wear, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed consultation, health-history assessment, and skin evaluation should be completed before treatment. The system should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals according to the supplied manual and local regulations.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active infection in the treatment area
-
Open wounds or active skin lesions
-
Uncontrolled medical or autoimmune conditions
-
Recent isotretinoin use
-
Active herpes simplex in the treatment area
-
Significant keloid tendency
-
Recent surgery or injectable treatment in the area
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Medications that affect healing or bleeding
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Individual risks and suitability should be assessed professionally. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever required.
Pre-Treatment and Aftercare Guidance
Before Treatment
-
Complete a professional skin consultation.
-
Review medications and previous procedures.
-
Avoid treating active infections or damaged skin.
-
Remove makeup and disinfect the area.
-
Apply topical numbing cream when appropriate.
-
Obtain documented informed consent.
After Treatment
-
Use gentle skincare during the initial recovery period.
-
Avoid aggressive exfoliation and strong active ingredients.
-
Avoid unnecessary heat and intense exercise as professionally advised.
-
Protect the treated area from excessive sun exposure.
-
Apply suitable broad-spectrum sunscreen.
-
Do not scratch, pick, or irritate the treated skin.
-
Follow all individualized practitioner instructions.
Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, pinpoint marks, or mild crusting may occur. Recovery experience varies according to treatment depth, energy, area, and individual skin response.
Intended Professional Users
The Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine is suitable for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Dermatology practices
-
Skin-rejuvenation centers
-
Cosmetic treatment clinics
-
Professional beauty centers
-
Body-contouring facilities
Practitioners should review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing RF microneedling treatments.
Why Choose the Morpheus 8?
Dual-Action RF Microneedling
The system combines fractional microneedling and radiofrequency energy, allowing practitioners to create controlled microchannels and deliver RF energy at selected tissue depths.
Adjustable 0.2–7.0mm Depth
A wide needle-depth range supports superficial facial rejuvenation, deeper scar treatments, skin tightening, and selected body-remodeling programs.
Four Cartridge Configurations
The 12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin, and Nano options provide different levels of precision and treatment coverage for facial and body applications.
Face and Body Versatility
One professional platform can support treatments for the face, eye area, jawline, neck, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and décolletage.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes training, operating documentation, treatment guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Morpheus 8?
The Morpheus 8 is a professional fractional RF microneedling system that combines controlled microneedling with radiofrequency energy for skin rejuvenation, tightening, texture improvement, and selected body treatments.
How is RF microneedling different from conventional microneedling?
Conventional microneedling creates controlled microchannels. RF microneedling also delivers radiofrequency energy at a selected depth, providing an additional thermal response within the targeted tissue.
What needle depths are available?
The machine provides an adjustable needle-depth range from 0.2mm to 7.0mm. The appropriate setting depends on the treatment area, skin condition, selected cartridge, and professional protocol.
Which cartridges are included?
The available configurations are 12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin, and Nano. Final quantities should be confirmed according to the selected package.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, under-eye region, lower face, jawline, neck, décolletage, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas.
How long does one session take?
A typical session takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the size of the treatment area, selected protocol, and preparation time.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied treatment information indicates that one to four sessions may be used, commonly spaced approximately four to six weeks apart. The final course should be personalized following professional assessment.
Is there recovery time?
Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, or pinpoint marks may occur. The source information indicates approximately one to three days of visible downtime, although deeper treatments may require a longer recovery period.
Can the system be used for acne scars?
Yes. Suitable clients may receive fractional RF microneedling treatments designed to support progressive collagen remodeling and improve the appearance of acne scars and uneven texture.
Can it be used for body treatments?
Yes. Its adjustable depth and different cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the abdomen, thighs, buttocks, décolletage, and other suitable areas.
Are results identical for every client?
No. Results and recovery vary according to age, skin condition, treatment depth, energy level, number of sessions, aftercare, and individual biological response.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Machine operation, cartridge selection, needle-depth guidance, treatment protocols, safety procedures, cleaning, maintenance, and ongoing technical support are included.
Add Professional RF Microneedling to Your Business
The Morpheus 8 enables aesthetic clinics, medical spas, and skin professionals to provide customizable facial rejuvenation, collagen-remodeling, skin-tightening, scar, and body-treatment programs.
Five key benefits:
-
Fractional microneedling and RF energy on one platform
-
Adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm
-
Four cartridge options for precise facial and body treatments
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,153.00
Professional Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Therapy System
Adjustable Air-Pressure Technology for Physiotherapy, Recovery, Body, and ED Applications
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B is a professional pneumatic ballistic shockwave system developed for physiotherapy, musculoskeletal rehabilitation, sports recovery, cellulite treatments, body-contouring programs, and professionally administered erectile-function protocols.
Its high-performance compressor accelerates an internal projectile inside the treatment handpiece, creating controlled pressure waves that are transferred into the selected treatment area through interchangeable heads.
The system provides adjustable pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar, frequency from 1 to 21Hz, eleven treatment heads, continuous and pulse modes, six preload settings, an impact counter, and an upgraded ED treatment interface.
0.5–6 Bar pressure | Eleven treatment heads | 1–21Hz frequency | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Technology
The ESWT-KP-B uses compressed air to accelerate a projectile inside the treatment handpiece. When the projectile reaches the selected treatment head, it generates mechanical pressure waves that travel into the targeted tissue.
Common applications include:
-
Physiotherapy treatments
-
Musculoskeletal rehabilitation
-
Sports-injury recovery
-
Tendon and soft-tissue programs
-
Cellulite treatments
-
Body-contouring programs
-
Professional erectile-function protocols
Adjustable Continuous and Pulse Modes
The system includes two delivery options for different professional treatment strategies.
C Mode delivers continuous impacts according to the selected frequency. P Mode provides pulsed delivery for protocols requiring a different impact pattern.
Common benefits include:
-
Customizable treatment delivery
-
Different programs for different conditions
-
Adjustable client-comfort levels
-
Precise impact management
-
Flexible professional protocols
Dedicated ED Treatment Software
The upgraded software includes a dedicated interface for professionally administered erectile-function protocols. It supports treatment-zone management, parameter adjustment, and accurate impact counting.
Common features include:
-
Dedicated ED treatment mode
-
Five-zone treatment planning
-
Adjustable pressure and frequency
-
Real-time impact counting
-
Structured multi-session protocols
-
Professional treatment documentation
ED applications should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice.
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Physiotherapy Program
Designed for professionally assessed musculoskeletal and soft-tissue conditions.
Recommended applications:
-
Tendon and soft-tissue treatments
-
Shoulder, elbow, and wrist programs
-
Hip, knee, and ankle treatments
-
Plantar-area treatments
-
Chronic musculoskeletal concerns
Recommended for:
-
Physiotherapy clients
-
Rehabilitation clients
-
Adults with professionally assessed musculoskeletal conditions
Sports-Recovery Program
Uses customizable pressure, frequency, and treatment heads to support targeted recovery programs.
Recommended applications:
-
Overuse-related conditions
-
Tendon recovery
-
Muscle and soft-tissue rehabilitation
-
Post-activity recovery support
-
Suitable sports injuries
Recommended for:
-
Athletes
-
Active adults
-
Fitness and recovery clients
-
Sports-rehabilitation facilities
Anti-Cellulite and Body Program
Uses radial or flat treatment heads for broader body areas and professional aesthetic protocols.
Recommended applications:
-
Cellulite appearance treatments
-
Body-texture improvement
-
Localized body-contouring programs
-
Skin-firming support
-
Soft-tissue stimulation
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about visible cellulite
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments
-
Clinics offering structured body-care programs
Erectile-Function Treatment Program
Uses the upgraded ED treatment software and suitable heads for professionally administered acoustic-wave protocols.
Recommended applications:
-
Professionally assessed erectile-function concerns
-
Vascular-support treatment programs
-
Structured acoustic-wave treatment courses
-
Men’s intimate wellness services
Recommended for:
-
Appropriately screened adult male clients
-
Specialist men’s wellness clinics
-
Qualified healthcare or wellness professionals
Adjustable Pressure, Frequency, and Treatment Settings
The ESWT-KP-B allows practitioners to customize shockwave treatments according to the selected application, treatment area, and client tolerance.
| Setting | Available Range | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Pressure | 0.5–6 Bar | Adjustable treatment intensity |
| Frequency | 1–21Hz | Customizable impact-delivery speed |
| Delivery Modes | Continuous and pulse | Different treatment patterns |
| Preload Settings | Six | Customizable projectile response |
| Treatment Heads | Eleven | Small, medium, and broad treatment areas |
| Impact Counter | Real-time tracking | Accurate session documentation |
| Display | 8-inch touchscreen | Parameter and protocol management |
All parameters should be selected according to professional assessment, treatment objectives, client response, and the supplied operating protocols.
Eleven Interchangeable Treatment Heads
The ESWT-KP-B includes radial, focus, and flat treatment heads in sizes ranging from 6mm to 25mm.
| Head Type | Available Sizes | General Application |
|---|---|---|
| Radial Heads | 10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm | Broad soft-tissue and body-area treatments |
| Focus Heads | 6mm, 10mm, 15mm, and 20mm | Concentrated and targeted applications |
| Flat Heads | 10mm, 15mm, and 20mm | Controlled surface and body treatments |
| Total Heads | Eleven | Complete professional treatment selection |
Radial Treatment Heads
Radial heads disperse pressure waves across a wider tissue area.
Common applications include:
-
Larger muscle groups
-
Broad soft-tissue regions
-
Cellulite treatments
-
General physiotherapy programs
-
Body-contouring applications
Focus Treatment Heads
Focus heads concentrate the mechanical energy within a smaller treatment area.
Common applications include:
-
Localized treatment points
-
Tendon attachments
-
Small musculoskeletal areas
-
Focused rehabilitation programs
-
Selected ED treatment zones
Flat Treatment Heads
Flat heads provide controlled contact across suitable surface areas.
Common applications include:
-
Body-texture treatments
-
Surface-level soft-tissue applications
-
Cellulite programs
-
Medium-sized treatment regions
-
General wellness treatments
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Upper-Body Areas
Different head sizes and pressure settings can be selected for upper-body physiotherapy and recovery programs.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Shoulder
-
Elbow
-
Hand and wrist
-
Upper back
-
Suitable arm muscles and tendons
Lower-Body Areas
The treatment head and parameters can be customized according to the location and size of the lower-body treatment area.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Hip
-
Knee
-
Thigh
-
Achilles tendon
-
Foot and ankle
-
Plantar area
Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Suitable heads and dedicated software support professionally administered body and intimate wellness protocols.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist
-
Buttocks
-
Inner and outer thighs
-
Legs
-
Professionally assessed ED treatment zones
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Category | Common Applications | Suggested Head Type |
|---|---|---|
| Physiotherapy | Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue programs | Focus or radial |
| Sports Recovery | Tendon, muscle, and overuse-related conditions | Protocol-dependent |
| Rehabilitation | Functional recovery and localized discomfort | Focus or radial |
| Cellulite Treatments | Cellulite appearance and body texture | Radial or flat |
| Body Contouring | Abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs | Radial |
| Erectile-Function Programs | Professionally administered acoustic-wave protocols | Suitable focus head |
Common Musculoskeletal Applications
The ESWT-KP-B may be incorporated into professional treatment plans for suitable clients with:
-
Tennis elbow
-
Tendinitis and tendinopathy
-
Plantar fasciitis
-
Frozen shoulder
-
Achilles tendon concerns
-
Ankle, knee, and wrist concerns
-
Shoulder impingement
-
Rotator-cuff concerns
-
Lumbar and hip discomfort
-
Chronic musculoskeletal concerns
-
Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation
-
Professionally assessed calcification concerns
Diagnosis, suitability, treatment settings, and expected outcomes should be determined by an appropriately qualified professional.
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment goals, and possible contraindications.
Step 2: Program and Head Selection
Select the appropriate physiotherapy, aesthetic, sports-recovery, rehabilitation, or ED program. Install the treatment head suited to the area and protocol.
Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select continuous or pulse mode, pressure, frequency, preload, and total impact count. Begin with conservative settings and adjust progressively according to client response.
Step 4: Shockwave Treatment
Apply suitable coupling medium when required and position the treatment head over the professionally identified area. Deliver the selected number of impacts while monitoring client comfort.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the coupling medium, inspect the area, document the treatment settings and impact count, and provide appropriate post-treatment guidance.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The ESWT-KP-B combines adjustable pneumatic shockwave technology with a compact footprint and extensive treatment-head selection.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional pneumatic ballistic shockwave technology
-
Adjustable 0.5–6 Bar pressure
-
Adjustable 1–21Hz frequency
-
Continuous and pulse delivery modes
-
Six customizable preload settings
-
Eleven interchangeable treatment heads
-
Radial, focus, and flat head designs
-
Head sizes from 6mm to 25mm
-
Upgraded ED treatment software
-
Real-time impact counter
-
8-inch color touchscreen
-
Easy projectile-replacement mechanism
-
200W power output
-
Compact 58 × 46 × 38cm package
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year parts warranty
-
Professional training and lifetime support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B |
| Model | ESWT-KP-B |
| Technology | Pneumatic ballistic shockwave |
| Energy Range | 0.5–6 Bar |
| Frequency Range | 1–21Hz |
| Power Output | 200W |
| Treatment Handpieces | One pneumatic ballistic handpiece |
| Treatment Heads | Eleven |
| Head Types | Radial, focus, and flat |
| Head Sizes | 6–25mm |
| Radial Heads | 10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm |
| Focus Heads | 6mm, 10mm, 15mm, and 20mm |
| Flat Heads | 10mm, 15mm, and 20mm |
| Display | 8-inch color touchscreen |
| Delivery Modes | Continuous and pulse |
| Preload Settings | Six |
| ED Treatment Software | Upgraded dedicated protocol |
| Impact Counter | Real-time session tracking |
| Package Dimensions | 58 × 46 × 38cm |
| Volume Weight | 28kg |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B main unit
-
1 × Pneumatic ballistic treatment handpiece
-
4 × Radial treatment heads
-
4 × Focus treatment heads
-
3 × Flat treatment heads
-
11 × Total treatment heads
-
1 × Integrated 8-inch touchscreen
-
Continuous and pulse treatment modes
-
Six preload settings
-
Real-time impact counter
-
Upgraded ED treatment software
-
Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Pneumatic shockwave operation training
-
Treatment-head selection guidance
-
Pressure and frequency adjustment guidance
-
Physiotherapy protocol training
-
Sports-recovery protocol training
-
Anti-cellulite protocol training
-
ED treatment protocol training
-
Client-screening documentation
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every ESWT-KP-B includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Pneumatic handpiece operation
-
Treatment-head selection
-
Pressure and frequency adjustment
-
Continuous and pulse modes
-
Preload and impact-count settings
-
Physiotherapy applications
-
Sports-recovery applications
-
Anti-cellulite applications
-
ED treatment software
-
Projectile replacement
-
Equipment cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Treatment heads, projectiles, sealing components, and other parts subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed medical consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. The ESWT-KP-B should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active thrombosis or blood clots
-
Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate medical clearance
-
Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Severely impaired sensation
-
Active growth plates in children
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Metal implants requiring medical clearance
-
Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Additional considerations for ED treatments include:
-
Active penile or genital infection
-
Active inflammation in the treatment area
-
Penile implants or prostheses
-
Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding
-
Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment
Client eligibility, diagnosis, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cables, and treatment heads before use.
-
Select the correct treatment head for the application.
-
Begin with conservative pressure and frequency settings.
-
Increase parameters progressively according to client response.
-
Use suitable coupling medium where required.
-
Monitor client comfort throughout the session.
-
Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record pressure, frequency, mode, and impact count.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after treatment.
-
Replace worn projectiles and components as directed.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Rehabilitation centers
-
Sports-medicine facilities
-
Musculoskeletal treatment practices
-
Men’s wellness clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Integrated wellness centers
-
Qualified medical and allied-health practices
Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering shockwave treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B?
Adjustable Pneumatic Shockwave Technology
The system provides adjustable pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar and frequency from 1 to 21Hz for personalized professional protocols.
Eleven Treatment Heads
Radial, focus, and flat heads in sizes from 6mm to 25mm support precise and broad treatment areas.
Dedicated ED Treatment Software
The upgraded interface provides structured treatment-zone management, adjustable parameters, and impact tracking for professionally administered protocols.
Multiple Professional Applications
One platform supports physiotherapy, sports recovery, musculoskeletal rehabilitation, cellulite treatments, body contouring, and ED programs.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes clinical operation training, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the ESWT-KP-B?
The ESWT-KP-B is a professional pneumatic ballistic shockwave system that generates mechanical pressure waves through a compressor-powered treatment handpiece.
How does pneumatic ballistic shockwave work?
Compressed air accelerates a projectile inside the handpiece. The projectile strikes the selected treatment head, creating pressure waves that transfer into the targeted tissue.
What pressure and frequency ranges are available?
The machine provides adjustable pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar and frequency from 1 to 21Hz.
How many treatment heads are included?
The system includes eleven heads: four radial, four focus, and three flat treatment heads.
What is the difference between the treatment heads?
Radial heads provide broader pressure-wave distribution, focus heads concentrate treatment on smaller areas, and flat heads provide controlled contact for suitable surface and body applications.
Which treatment modes are available?
The machine includes continuous and pulse delivery modes, six preload settings, and an upgraded ED treatment interface.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the shoulder, elbow, wrist, lumbar region, hip, knee, thigh, Achilles tendon, foot, ankle, abdomen, waist, buttocks, legs, and suitable ED treatment zones.
Can the machine be used for cellulite treatments?
Yes. Radial and flat treatment heads can be incorporated into professional cellulite and body-texture programs.
Can it support ED treatment protocols?
Yes. The machine includes upgraded ED software and suitable treatment heads. This application should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements.
Is treatment uncomfortable?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, condition, pressure, frequency, and individual sensitivity. Settings can be adjusted during the session to maintain appropriate tolerance.
How many sessions are recommended?
The number and frequency of sessions depend on the application, client condition, professional assessment, and treatment protocol. Results and required course length should not be guaranteed.
Can it be combined with other treatments?
It may be incorporated into a broader professional treatment plan when the combination is appropriate, compatible, and permitted within the practitioner’s scope.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, treatment-head selection, pressure and frequency settings, treatment protocols, safety, client screening, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Pneumatic Shockwave Therapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B enables qualified clinics and wellness facilities to provide customizable pneumatic shockwave treatments using one compact professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Adjustable pneumatic pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar
-
Frequency control from 1 to 21Hz
-
Eleven radial, focus, and flat treatment heads
-
Dedicated ED software with continuous and pulse modes
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,799.00
Strengthen pelvic floor muscles through a comfortable, fully clothed treatment experience. The Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair uses professional HIEMT technology to stimulate thousands of deep pelvic floor muscle contractions without surgery, needles or physical exercise.
During a 30-minute session, the machine can generate up to 12,000 Kegel-equivalent muscle contractions, helping professional clinics offer efficient, non-invasive pelvic floor training.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Pelvic Floor Chair?
- Up to 12,000 Kegel-equivalent contractions per session
- Professional HIEMT electromagnetic stimulation
- Non-invasive and needle-free
- Treatment performed while the client remains fully clothed
- Comfortable 30-minute sessions
- No anesthesia or recovery time
- Adjustable energy output
- Easy-to-use touchscreen control
- Suitable for professional clinics and wellness centers
- Three-year machine warranty
Professional HIEMT Pelvic Floor Technology
HIEMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to the pelvic floor area. This energy stimulates repeated supramaximal muscle contractions that would be difficult to achieve through voluntary Kegel exercises alone.
The treatment is designed to activate and train deep pelvic floor muscles while the client sits comfortably in the chair. Intensity can be adjusted according to the client’s comfort level and treatment plan.
Common Applications
This professional Kegel machine may be incorporated into programs designed to support:
- Pelvic floor muscle strengthening
- Postpartum pelvic floor recovery
- Improved pelvic muscle control
- Bladder-control and continence support
- Intimate wellness programs
- Core stability and posture support
- Menopause-related pelvic wellness
- Age-related pelvic muscle weakness
This machine supports pelvic floor training and wellness services. It is not intended to diagnose or independently treat medical conditions.
Simple, Fully Clothed Sessions
Clients sit comfortably on the pelvic floor chair without removing their clothing. Once the treatment intensity is selected, the machine stimulates rhythmic pelvic muscle contractions throughout the session.
A standard session lasts approximately 30 minutes, with no needles, incisions or anesthesia required. Clients can normally return to their regular activities immediately afterward.
Recommended Treatment Schedule
A commonly used introductory plan includes:
- Two sessions per week
- Approximately 30 minutes per session
- Treatment intensity adjusted progressively
- Continued sessions based on individual goals and professional assessment
The number of sessions and results will vary according to muscle condition, age, health history and consistency.
Designed for Professional Businesses
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is suitable for businesses looking to expand their non-invasive wellness services, including:
- Medical spas
- Aesthetic clinics
- Pelvic wellness centers
- Postpartum recovery centers
- Physiotherapy and rehabilitation practices
- Women’s wellness clinics
- Fitness and body-contouring studios
Its touchscreen controls and adjustable settings make treatment operation straightforward for trained professionals.
Machine Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional pelvic floor chair |
| Technology | HIEMT electromagnetic stimulation |
| Session duration | Approximately 30 minutes |
| Muscle contractions | Up to 12,000 Kegel-equivalent contractions |
| Power supply | 110–240V |
| Adjustable output | 300–5000W |
| Control system | Touchscreen |
| Treatment method | Non-invasive and fully clothed |
| Downtime | None normally required |
| Available colors | Pink, blue |
| Recommended capacity | Approximately 4–6 sessions per day |
| Warranty | Three years |
Specifications and appearance may vary according to configuration. Confirm the required voltage, plug type, color and final technical configuration before ordering.
What Is Included?
Your machine package includes:
- Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair
- English user manual
- Three-hour video training
- Treatment protocols
- Client education materials
- Service-menu and pricing guidance
- Marketing templates
- Remote setup assistance
- Software updates
- Lifetime technical support
- Three-year warranty
Safety and Contraindications
Every client should complete an appropriate health screening before treatment. This machine may not be suitable for people with:
- Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
- Metal implants near the treatment area
- Pregnancy
- Active infection or inflammation
- Recent surgery in the treatment area
- Serious cardiovascular or neurological conditions
- Unexplained pelvic pain or bleeding
Clients experiencing incontinence, pelvic organ prolapse, persistent pelvic pain or other medical symptoms should seek evaluation from a qualified healthcare professional. Treatment should only be provided by trained operators in accordance with the user manual and local regulations.
Order Your Professional Pelvic Floor Chair
Add a comfortable, non-invasive pelvic floor training service to your clinic with the Wikbeauty EMSLIM Kegel Machine.
Contact Wikbeauty today for the current price, available colors, shipping quotation and configuration options.
Receives in 8 days.
$799.00
Professional Photon LED Anti-Aging System
630–660nm Red Light Therapy for Skin Rejuvenation and Collagen Support
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine is a professional LED light therapy system developed for skin rejuvenation, wrinkle care, collagen support, complexion brightening, and general anti-aging treatments.
The machine delivers red light at wavelengths between 630nm and 660nm. This non-invasive light therapy supports cellular activity and the skin’s natural renewal processes without needles, incisions, or abrasive treatments.
With 15–30-minute sessions, digital or touchscreen controls, dual-voltage compatibility, and professional and home-use options, the system is suitable for beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, spas, skincare studios, and personal beauty routines.
630–660nm red light | Professional and home use | Non-invasive treatment | CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
630–660nm Photon LED Therapy
The system emits red light within the 630–660nm wavelength range for controlled skin-rejuvenation treatments.
Common applications include:
-
General facial rejuvenation
-
Fine-line and wrinkle care
-
Skin-radiance programs
-
Texture-improvement treatments
-
Neck and décolletage care
-
Hand-rejuvenation programs
Collagen and Elastin Support
Red light therapy supports cellular energy activity and the skin’s natural collagen and elastin processes.
Common applications include:
-
Reduced skin firmness
-
Early signs of aging
-
Fine-line care
-
Skin-elasticity support
-
Improved-looking texture
-
General age-management programs
Complexion and Skin-Quality Care
Photon LED treatments can be incorporated into professional services designed to support a brighter and more even-looking complexion.
Common applications include:
-
Dull-looking skin
-
Uneven-looking skin tone
-
Age-spot appearance
-
Pigmentation-appearance care
-
Post-acne skin support
-
General skin-radiance programs
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses the red light function for general facial skin-quality and age-management treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Reduced skin radiance
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Early signs of aging
-
General facial rejuvenation
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking non-invasive facial care
-
Clients concerned about visible signs of aging
-
Clients wanting progressive skin-quality support
Firmness and Elasticity Program
Provides a structured treatment course focused on collagen support and improved-looking skin firmness.
Recommended applications:
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Neck and décolletage treatments
-
Skin-elasticity support
-
Fine-line care
-
General collagen-support programs
Recommended for:
-
Mature-skin clients
-
Clients concerned about reduced elasticity
-
Clients receiving professional anti-aging treatments
Brightening and Tone Program
Uses regular photon treatments to support a brighter and more even-looking complexion.
Recommended applications:
-
Dull-looking skin
-
Uneven-looking tone
-
Age-spot appearance
-
Pigmentation-appearance care
-
Skin-radiance programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved-looking brightness
-
Clients concerned about uneven tone
-
Clients receiving seasonal skincare programs
Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatments after completion of the client’s initial photon therapy course.
Recommended applications:
-
Skin-radiance maintenance
-
Fine-line care
-
Collagen-support maintenance
-
General anti-aging skincare
-
Continued complexion care
Recommended for:
-
Returning photon therapy clients
-
Clients completing a four- to six-week course
-
Home users following the supplied instructions
Adjustable Treatment Duration and Frequency
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine allows treatments to be scheduled according to the client’s skin condition, treatment objectives, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Light Technology | Photon LED red light | Non-invasive skin-rejuvenation treatment |
| Wavelength Range | 630–660nm | Red light therapy |
| Session Duration | Approximately 15–30 minutes | Customizable treatment time |
| Initial Course | Three to four sessions weekly | Structured skin-care program |
| Course Duration | Approximately four to six weeks | Progressive treatment planning |
| Maintenance | One to two sessions monthly | Continued skin-quality support |
| Control System | Digital or touchscreen, model-dependent | Treatment management |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V | Dual-voltage compatibility |
Session duration and treatment frequency should be selected according to the supplied instructions, client response, skin sensitivity, and professional assessment.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Face
The photon LED system supports non-invasive facial treatments for different age-management and skin-quality objectives.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Fine-line care
-
Wrinkle-appearance reduction
-
Complexion brightening
-
Improved-looking texture
-
General skin rejuvenation
Neck and Décolletage
Red light therapy can be incorporated into professional treatments for suitable neck and upper-chest areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Neck-line care
-
Improved-looking firmness
-
Décolletage rejuvenation
-
Skin-radiance support
-
Collagen-support programs
Hands and Body
Suitable configurations support treatments for the hands and selected body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Hand-rejuvenation treatments
-
Age-spot appearance care
-
Body skin-texture support
-
Post-acne skin care
-
General skin-quality improvement
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Program |
|---|---|---|
| Face | Fine-line care, radiance, and rejuvenation | Facial-rejuvenation program |
| Neck | Firmness and neck-line care | Firmness and elasticity program |
| Décolletage | Texture and skin-radiance support | Rejuvenation program |
| Hands | Age-spot appearance and texture care | Brightening and tone program |
| Selected Body Areas | General skin-quality support | Professionally selected program |
| Post-Acne Areas | Texture and skin-recovery support | Suitable skin-quality program |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s skin condition, treatment objectives, medications, previous procedures, photosensitivity, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Skin Preparation
Clean the selected treatment area and remove makeup, skincare products, jewelry, and reflective accessories.
Step 3: Treatment Setup
Position the machine correctly, select the treatment duration and available settings, and provide appropriate eye protection.
Step 4: Photon LED Treatment
Activate the red light for approximately 15–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort and skin response throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Switch off the system, inspect the treated area, document the treatment duration and settings, and provide suitable skincare and sun-protection guidance.
Designed for Professional and Personal Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine combines professional red light therapy with straightforward digital operation.
Key advantages include:
-
630–660nm photon LED technology
-
Non-invasive red light treatment
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Fine-line and wrinkle-care programs
-
Collagen and elastin support
-
Complexion-brightening treatments
-
Approximately 15–30-minute sessions
-
Digital or touchscreen controls
-
Professional salon and spa use
-
Suitable home-use configuration
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine |
| Technology | Photon LED red light therapy |
| Wavelength Range | 630–660nm |
| Primary Functions | Skin rejuvenation, fine-line care, brightening, and collagen support |
| Treatment Areas | Face, neck, décolletage, hands, and selected body areas |
| Session Duration | Approximately 15–30 minutes |
| Recommended Initial Course | Three to four sessions weekly for four to six weeks |
| Suggested Maintenance | One to two sessions monthly |
| Display and Controls | Digital or touchscreen, model-dependent |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Use Cases | Professional and home use |
| Skin-Type Suitability | Suitable for different skin types following assessment |
| Certificates | CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine
-
Integrated 630–660nm red light treatment system
-
Digital or touchscreen control interface
-
Region-compatible power adapter
-
Power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Eye-protection accessories according to package
-
Warranty card
The exact control interface and accessory configuration should follow the selected model and package.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety instructions
-
Treatment-duration guidance
-
Facial-treatment protocols
-
Neck and décolletage protocols
-
Hand and body treatment guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Eye-safety guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine includes operating guidance to help professionals and approved home users operate the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Digital or touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Photosensitivity assessment
-
Treatment-area preparation
-
Correct machine positioning
-
Session-duration selection
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Neck and décolletage treatments
-
Hand and body protocols
-
Eye-protection requirements
-
Post-treatment skincare
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Eye-protection accessories, power adapters, cables, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, liquid exposure, improper storage, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and skin assessment should be completed before treatment. The device should be operated according to the supplied instructions.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy without appropriate medical guidance
-
Photosensitive medical conditions
-
Photosensitizing medications
-
Active skin cancer or a history requiring medical assessment
-
Active infection or open wounds within the treatment area
-
Severe skin inflammation
-
Recent aggressive skin treatments
-
Medical conditions affected by light exposure
-
Reduced or impaired skin sensation
-
Conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients using prescription retinoids, photosensitizing skincare, or photosensitizing medication should receive appropriate professional guidance before treatment.
Eye protection should be used according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Clients should not look directly into the active LED light source.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, power adapter, cable, and accessories before use.
-
Complete a consultation and photosensitivity assessment.
-
Clean the treatment area before beginning.
-
Remove makeup, jewelry, and reflective items.
-
Position the machine according to the supplied instructions.
-
Use appropriate eye protection.
-
Follow the recommended treatment duration.
-
Do not exceed the supplied usage frequency.
-
Monitor client comfort and skin response.
-
Do not use over prohibited or unsuitable areas.
-
Clean the equipment after every professional client.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected discomfort or skin reaction occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators and approved users in:
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Professional spas
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Wellness centers
-
Anti-aging treatment facilities
-
Personal home beauty environments
Professional operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering LED light therapy.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine?
Professional Red Light Wavelengths
The system delivers red light between 630nm and 660nm for non-invasive skin-rejuvenation and collagen-support programs.
Multiple Skin-Care Applications
One system supports fine-line care, wrinkle-appearance treatments, complexion brightening, texture improvement, and general skin rejuvenation.
Face and Body Versatility
Suitable configurations support treatments for the face, neck, décolletage, hands, and selected body areas.
Professional and Home-Use Flexibility
Straightforward digital controls and adjustable treatment duration support professional services and approved personal use.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, treatment protocols, CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine?
It is a red light therapy system developed for skin rejuvenation, fine-line care, complexion brightening, collagen support, and general anti-aging treatments.
What wavelengths does the machine use?
The system delivers red light within the 630–660nm wavelength range.
How does photon red light therapy work?
Red light is absorbed by light-responsive components within cells and may support cellular energy activity and natural skin-renewal processes.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, décolletage, hands, and suitable body areas.
How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 15–30 minutes.
How often is treatment recommended?
Recommends three to four sessions per week for an initial four- to six-week course, followed by periodic maintenance.
When may users notice changes?
Some users may notice early skin-quality changes within approximately two weeks, with progressive improvement over four to twelve weeks. Individual results vary.
Is the treatment painful?
Red light therapy is generally non-invasive and does not create muscle contractions or abrasive sensations. Some users may notice mild warmth.
Is there downtime?
Users can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Individual skin response may vary.
Is eye protection required?
Appropriate eye protection should be used according to the supplied instructions. Users should never look directly into the active LED light source.
Can the machine be used at home?
The supplied information indicates professional and home-use suitability. Home users must follow the operating manual, treatment schedule, safety guidance, and contraindications.
Is it suitable for every skin type?
Red light therapy may be used across different skin types, but individual assessment remains important, especially for photosensitive conditions or medications.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to age, skin condition, treatment consistency, lifestyle, skincare routine, sun exposure, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment positioning, session duration, eye safety, treatment protocols, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional Photon Skin Rejuvenation to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine enables beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, spas, and skincare professionals to provide non-invasive red light therapy for facial and body rejuvenation.
Five key benefits:
-
Professional 630–660nm photon LED technology
-
Fine-line, wrinkle, brightness, and collagen-support programs
-
Treatments for the face, neck, hands, and selected body areas
-
Professional and approved home-use flexibility
-
CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, model details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,829.00
Professional High-Intensity Pulsed Magnetic Therapy System
Dual-Mode Electromagnetic Technology for Physiotherapy and Rehabilitation
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is a professional pulsed electromagnetic therapy system developed for physiotherapy, rehabilitation and appropriately supervised musculoskeletal applications.
With a manufacturer-stated peak magnetic-field strength of 4 Tesla at the applicator coil, two operating modes and a flexible positioning arm, the system supports hands-free treatment workflows in professional clinical environments.
A 10.4-inch touchscreen, integrated water-cooling system and universal voltage compatibility provide convenient operation for qualified physiotherapists and healthcare professionals.
Four-Tesla peak field | Two treatment modes | Hands-free operation | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Magnetic-Therapy Modes
ST Mode — High-Frequency Pulsed Operation
ST Mode provides high-frequency pulsed electromagnetic stimulation with an oscillation frequency of up to 130 kHz according to the supplied specification.
This mode can be incorporated into professionally supervised programs focused on:
-
Selected musculoskeletal conditions
-
Muscle-stimulation protocols
-
Rehabilitation support
-
Selected joint and soft-tissue applications
-
Other uses authorized for the device
MT Mode — 50 Hz Magnetic Operation
MT Mode delivers pulsed magnetic stimulation at 50 Hz.
It provides an alternative operating format for protocols involving:
-
Neuromuscular stimulation
-
Muscle relaxation
-
Selected pain-management programs
-
Rehabilitation support
-
Other professionally assessed applications
The appropriate mode and parameters must be selected according to the client’s diagnosis, treatment area, contraindications and professional protocol.
Understanding the Four-Tesla Specification
The supplied technical information lists:
-
Peak magnetic-field strength at the coil: 4 T
-
Magnetic-field strength at 4 cm: 0.4 T
-
Manufacturer-stated maximum reach: up to 18 cm
-
Magnetic-field change rate: 92 T/s
The 4 T figure refers to peak output at the applicator coil. Magnetic-field strength decreases with distance from the coil, as reflected by the stated 0.4 T measurement at 4 cm.
Treatment effect depends on:
-
Distance from the applicator
-
Applicator positioning
-
Pulse waveform
-
Frequency
-
Exposure duration
-
Tissue anatomy
-
Individual response
Non-Contact, Hands-Free Operation
The flexible positioning arm holds the treatment applicator over the selected area during operation.
This provides several workflow advantages:
-
Consistent applicator placement
-
Reduced need for continuous handpiece movement
-
Convenient positioning around larger joints and muscle groups
-
Minimal preparation compared with contact-based modalities
-
No conductive gel required
-
Treatment through suitable non-metallic clothing
-
Easier integration into professional rehabilitation workflows
Hands-free operation does not mean the patient can be left completely unattended. The practitioner should monitor positioning, comfort and system performance throughout treatment.
Potential Professional Applications
Subject to the device’s authorized indications, professional diagnosis and applicable local regulations, pulsed magnetic therapy may be incorporated into rehabilitation programs concerning:
-
Selected knee, hip, shoulder or elbow concerns
-
Muscular tension or spasm
-
Selected osteoarthritis-related symptoms
-
Rehabilitation following suitable sports injuries
-
Selected chronic musculoskeletal pain
-
Range-of-motion programs
-
Neuromuscular stimulation
-
Post-treatment rehabilitation under professional supervision
-
Other applications authorized for the system
Clinical evidence varies between conditions, devices and protocols. The PM-ST should not be promoted as treating virtually every pain, spinal, tendon, bone or inflammatory condition.
Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The Physio Magneto PM-ST should not be advertised as guaranteeing:
-
Cellular re-energization
-
Restoration of cell-membrane potential
-
Increased ATP production
-
Accelerated bone healing
-
Permanent pain relief
-
Elimination of inflammation
-
Reversal of degenerative disease
-
Restoration of damaged spinal tissue
-
Improved circulation in every patient
-
No adverse effects
-
Safety for all age groups or medical conditions
These outcomes require evidence for the exact device, parameters, condition and patient population.
How Pulsed Magnetic Stimulation Works
The applicator coil produces a time-varying magnetic field.
A changing magnetic field can induce electrical activity within nearby conductive tissue. Depending on the output, frequency and positioning, this may stimulate peripheral nerves and muscles.
The client may experience:
-
Muscle contractions
-
Twitching
-
Tapping or pulsing sensations
-
Tingling
-
Temporary muscle fatigue
-
Post-treatment soreness
The technology is non-contact and does not use needles or surgical incisions. However, “non-invasive” does not mean risk-free or suitable for every patient.
Build a Professional Rehabilitation Workflow
Joint-Area Protocols
Position the applicator over an appropriately assessed joint area using the flexible support arm.
Large Muscle-Group Stimulation
The high-intensity magnetic field can support professionally controlled stimulation of suitable muscle groups.
Neuromuscular Applications
MT Mode provides a lower-frequency option for selected neuromuscular protocols.
Rehabilitation Programs
The system may be incorporated into a broader rehabilitation plan that includes exercise, manual therapy and other evidence-based interventions.
Monitoring and Reassessment
Treatment progress should be evaluated using appropriate clinical outcome measures rather than relying only on subjective improvement claims.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s diagnosis, symptoms, medical history, implanted devices and contraindications.
2. Treatment Planning
The practitioner selects ST Mode or MT Mode according to the clinical objective and device instructions.
3. Applicator Positioning
The patient is positioned comfortably and all metallic objects are removed from the treatment field. The applicator is secured using the adjustable arm.
4. Parameter Selection
Frequency, intensity, treatment time and other available settings are selected according to the professional protocol.
5. Controlled Treatment
Treatment begins while the practitioner monitors patient comfort, muscle response and applicator position.
6. Post-Treatment Assessment
The practitioner checks for discomfort, muscle fatigue, soreness or other responses and documents the session.
7. Follow-Up
Further sessions are scheduled only when appropriate based on the patient’s response and treatment plan.
A universal 10–20-minute protocol or fixed 8–12-session course should not be promised for every condition.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | Physio Magneto PM-ST |
| Product type | Professional pulsed magnetic therapy system |
| Technology | High-intensity pulsed electromagnetic stimulation |
| Operating modes | ST Mode and MT Mode |
| Peak field strength at coil | Up to 4 T |
| Field strength at 4 cm | Approximately 0.4 T |
| Manufacturer-stated maximum reach | Up to 18 cm |
| Maximum oscillation frequency | Up to 130 kHz |
| MT Mode frequency | 50 Hz |
| Magnetic-field change rate | 92 T/s |
| Therapeutic-intensity reference | Manufacturer-stated ≥10 mT |
| Display | 10.4-inch touchscreen |
| Applicator support | Flexible hands-free positioning arm |
| Cooling system | Integrated water cooling |
| Water-cooling capacity | 2.5 L |
| Input voltage | AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz |
| Package dimensions | 66 × 60 × 49 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 40 kg |
| Warranty | Three-year limited parts warranty |
| Technical support | Lifetime remote support |
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One Physio Magneto PM-ST control system
-
One magnetic-field treatment applicator
-
One flexible positioning arm
-
Integrated water-cooling system
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
-
Required connection accessories
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
ST Mode operating guidance
-
MT Mode operating guidance
-
Patient-screening guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Water-cooling maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering:
-
Machine installation
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Applicator positioning
-
ST and MT Mode selection
-
Basic parameter adjustment
-
Patient screening
-
Removal of metallic objects
-
Treatment monitoring
-
Water-cooling maintenance
-
Cleaning and storage
-
Basic troubleshooting
A training certificate is provided after completion.
Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical support.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen
-
Original treatment applicator
-
Flexible positioning arm
-
Water-cooling components
-
Original connectors
-
Other eligible machine parts
Consumable, wear and maintenance components may have separate coverage terms.
Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper water-cooling maintenance
-
Use of unsuitable cooling liquid
-
Damage caused by dropping the applicator
-
Normal wear of moving or support components
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Contraindications and Safety Precautions
High-intensity pulsed magnetic fields can interact with implanted devices and metallic objects.
The system must not be used without appropriate professional assessment.
Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist clearance in patients with:
-
Pacemakers
-
Implantable cardioverter-defibrillators
-
Neurostimulators
-
Medication pumps
-
Cochlear implants
-
Other active electronic implants
-
Ferromagnetic implants or metal in the treatment field
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Active cancer in the treatment area
-
Recent bleeding or significant bleeding disorders
-
Uncontrolled seizure disorders
-
Severe cardiovascular conditions
-
Impaired sensation
-
Other contraindications listed in the user manual
Additional Operating Precautions
-
Remove phones, watches, keys, cards and other metallic or electronic objects from the treatment field.
-
Do not position the applicator over the head, eyes or other prohibited areas unless specifically authorized.
-
Confirm implant compatibility before treatment.
-
Monitor the patient for excessive contractions, discomfort, dizziness or other adverse responses.
-
Ensure the applicator is securely positioned before starting.
-
Maintain the water-cooling system according to the supplied instructions.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is suitable for:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Rehabilitation centers
-
Sports-medicine practices
-
Orthopedic rehabilitation clinics
-
Pain-management practices
-
Qualified physical therapists
-
Appropriately trained healthcare professionals
The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose Physio Magneto PM-ST?
High-Intensity Magnetic Output
The system provides a manufacturer-stated peak field strength of up to 4 T at the applicator coil.
Two Operating Modes
Choose between high-frequency ST Mode and 50 Hz MT Mode according to the professional protocol.
Hands-Free Positioning
The flexible arm supports stable applicator placement during supervised treatment.
Non-Contact Operation
Treatment can be delivered through suitable non-metallic clothing without conductive gel.
Integrated Water Cooling
The 2.5 L cooling system supports controlled equipment temperature during professional operation.
Universal Voltage
AC 100–240 V compatibility supports installation across multiple international markets.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training, a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical assistance are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is Physio Magneto PM-ST?
It is a professional high-intensity pulsed magnetic therapy system with two operating modes and a peak field strength of up to 4 T at the applicator coil.
Is PM-ST the same as conventional low-intensity PEMF?
No. PM-ST uses substantially higher peak magnetic output than many low-intensity consumer PEMF products. Research on one type of electromagnetic device cannot automatically validate another.
What is the difference between ST Mode and MT Mode?
ST Mode provides higher-frequency pulsed operation up to the machine’s specified maximum. MT Mode operates at 50 Hz for a different stimulation format.
Can patients remain clothed?
The magnetic field can pass through suitable non-metallic clothing. Metallic items, electronic devices and unsuitable garments must be removed from the treatment field.
Is treatment painless?
Patients may experience contractions, twitching, tingling or tapping sensations. Intensity should be adjusted according to professional judgment and patient tolerance.
Is there any downtime?
Many patients may continue normal activities after treatment, but temporary muscle fatigue, soreness or cramping may occur.
Is it safe for patients with pacemakers?
No. High-intensity pulsed magnetic fields may interfere with pacemakers and other active implants. These patients should not be treated unless expressly permitted by the device instructions and relevant medical specialists.
How many sessions are required?
There is no universal treatment course for every condition. Frequency and session number must be determined by a qualified professional.
What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Accidental damage, misuse, improper cooling maintenance and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Add High-Intensity Magnetic Therapy to Your Practice
The Physio Magneto PM-ST combines:
-
Up to 4 T peak magnetic output
-
ST and MT operating modes
-
Hands-free applicator positioning
-
A 10.4-inch touchscreen
-
Integrated water cooling
Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations.
Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Receives in 8 days.
From $1,499.00
Professional Portable 7D HIFU System
Dual-Handle Technology for Facial Lifting and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is a professional dual-handle system designed for non-surgical facial treatments, skin firming and body-contouring applications.
A dedicated Face Handle and Body Handle provide seven cartridge depths ranging from 1.5 mm to 13 mm. This allows trained operators to select an appropriate treatment depth for the face, neck or larger body areas.
Its 15-inch touchscreen, universal voltage and portable desktop design make the system suitable for beauty salons, med spas, aesthetic clinics and qualified independent practitioners.
Two dedicated handles | Seven cartridge depths | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
One Portable System for Face and Body Treatments
Face Handle
The Face Handle is supplied with four treatment depths for professional facial and neck applications:
-
1.5 mm
-
2.0 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
The available cartridges allow trained operators to develop treatment protocols for different facial areas and tissue depths.
Common applications include:
-
Facial skin firming
-
Jawline definition
-
Neck treatments
-
Brow-area lifting
-
Improvement in the appearance of fine lines
-
Facial contour refinement
Body Handle
The Body Handle uses deeper cartridges for professional body-contouring and skin-firming applications:
-
6.0 mm
-
9.0 mm
-
13.0 mm
These depths are intended for larger treatment areas such as:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist and flanks
-
Upper and lower back
-
Upper arms
-
Thighs
-
Hips
-
Buttocks
Cartridge selection and energy parameters must be determined by a trained operator after completing a client consultation.
Dedicated 5.5 MHz Eye-Area Cartridge
The 2.0 mm cartridge operates at 5.5 MHz and is designed for precise treatments around appropriate areas near the eyes.
It may be incorporated into professional protocols focused on:
-
Appearance of crow’s feet
-
Fine lines around the eye area
-
Localized skin firming
-
Delicate facial areas requiring precise energy placement
Treatments near the eyes require advanced knowledge of facial anatomy, correct cartridge positioning and strict adherence to the manufacturer’s safety instructions.
The cartridge must never be applied directly over the eye, eyelid or any area prohibited by the operating manual.
Seven Treatment Depths for Greater Flexibility
| Cartridge depth | Handle | Intended area |
|---|---|---|
| 1.5 mm | Face Handle | Superficial facial applications |
| 2.0 mm | Face Handle | Precision and eye-area protocols |
| 3.0 mm | Face Handle | Facial and neck treatments |
| 4.5 mm | Face Handle | Deeper facial and jawline protocols |
| 6.0 mm | Body Handle | Shallow body-treatment areas |
| 9.0 mm | Body Handle | Medium-depth body applications |
| 13.0 mm | Body Handle | Deeper body-contouring protocols |
The table provides general positioning information only. Treatment depth must be selected according to the client’s anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment area and professional protocol.
How 7D HIFU Technology Works
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at a selected treatment depth without creating a surgical incision.
When applied correctly, controlled energy is directed below the skin’s surface to support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling response. Professional HIFU treatments are commonly incorporated into aesthetic programs focused on skin firming, lifting and contour refinement.
The dual-handle design separates facial and body applications, helping operators select the correct handpiece and cartridge for each treatment area.
Individual responses and outcomes vary. Results depend on factors such as age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and the protocol used.
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment category | Common areas | Intended aesthetic application |
|---|---|---|
| Facial rejuvenation | Forehead, cheeks and lower face | Skin firming and contour refinement |
| Eye-area treatments | Suitable areas around the eyes | Fine-line appearance and localized firming |
| Jawline contouring | Lower face and jawline | Definition and tightening |
| Neck treatments | Neck and submental area | Firming and contour refinement |
| Body contouring | Abdomen, waist and back | Non-invasive contouring programs |
| Body firming | Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks | Skin-firming treatments |
Treatment suitability should be confirmed through a complete consultation and contraindication assessment.
Build a Complete Face and Body Service Menu
Facial HIFU Treatments
Use the 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges to develop professional facial treatment protocols at different depths.
Precision Eye-Area Treatments
The specialized 2.0 mm, 5.5 MHz cartridge provides an additional service option for suitable areas around the eyes.
Jawline and Neck Contouring
Selectable facial cartridge depths support structured treatments for the lower face, jawline and neck.
Body-Contouring Treatments
The 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm body cartridges allow operators to work with different body areas and tissue depths.
Combination Treatment Plans
Qualified professionals may incorporate face and body services into structured treatment plans. Each area must be assessed and treated according to its individual requirements.
Portable Design for Flexible Treatment Spaces
At approximately 17 kg net weight, the system provides the functionality of a dual-handle face and body platform in a portable desktop format.
This makes it suitable for:
-
Clinics with limited treatment-room space
-
Beauty salons offering multiple services
-
Practitioners working across different rooms
-
Med spas seeking a compact HIFU system
-
Qualified mobile practitioners with appropriate transport procedures
Portable does not mean handheld or suitable for casual transportation. The machine should be moved, packed and installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Professional Operating Controls
The machine provides a large touchscreen interface and adjustable treatment parameters for controlled professional operation.
Key operating features include:
-
15-inch color touchscreen
-
Dedicated Face and Body Handles
-
Continuous and single-shot modes
-
Adjustable energy output
-
Adjustable dot spacing
-
Seven treatment depths
-
Cartridge capacity of 10,000–20,000 shots
-
Universal AC 100–240 V input
-
200 W rated power
All parameters should be selected according to the treatment area, cartridge depth, client condition and recommended professional protocol.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s treatment goals, medical history, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications.
2. Handle and Cartridge Selection
The Face or Body Handle is selected, followed by the cartridge depth appropriate for the treatment area.
3. Skin Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed, marked where required and prepared using the recommended coupling medium.
4. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the energy, dot spacing and single-shot or continuous mode according to the approved protocol.
5. Controlled Energy Delivery
The treatment is performed using correct positioning and technique. Client comfort and skin response should be monitored throughout the session.
6. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare guidance.
Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, tenderness or tingling may occur. Recovery experience varies according to the area treated, energy settings and individual response.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional portable 7D HIFU machine |
| Technology | Focused ultrasound for face and body applications |
| Treatment handles | One Face Handle and one Body Handle |
| Total cartridges | Seven |
| Face cartridges | 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Eye-area cartridge | 2.0 mm depth at 5.5 MHz |
| Body cartridges | 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm |
| Standard frequencies | 4 MHz and 7 MHz |
| Adjustable energy | 1.0–3.0 J maximum |
| Cartridge capacity | Approximately 10,000–20,000 shots |
| Dot spacing | 1–2 mm, adjustable in 0.1 mm increments |
| Operating modes | Continuous and single-shot |
| Display | 15-inch touchscreen |
| Rated power | 200 W |
| Input voltage | AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz |
| Net weight | Approximately 17 kg |
| Packaged weight | Approximately 20 kg |
| Package dimensions | 58 × 36 × 52 cm |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty |
| Declared compliance | CE and RoHS documentation available according to the ordered model |
Specifications may be updated or vary according to the production configuration. Request the current technical datasheet before ordering.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One portable 7D HIFU touchscreen console
-
One Face Handle
-
One Body Handle
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
Face Cartridges
-
One 1.5 mm cartridge
-
One 2.0 mm, 5.5 MHz cartridge
-
One 3.0 mm cartridge
-
One 4.5 mm cartridge
Body Cartridges
-
One 6.0 mm cartridge
-
One 9.0 mm cartridge
-
One 13.0 mm cartridge
Documentation and Support
-
English user manual
-
Setup guidance
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Final package contents and cartridge shot capacity should be confirmed on the quotation before payment.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Equipment installation
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Handle and cartridge installation
-
Cartridge-depth selection
-
Basic parameter adjustment
-
Facial and body treatment protocols
-
Eye-area safety considerations
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace any professional qualification, anatomy training or license required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects involving:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Original Face and Body Handles
-
Handle connectors
-
Other eligible original machine components
Cartridges are limited-use components and may have separate warranty or replacement conditions.
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Misuse or incorrect operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or transportation
-
Normal cartridge depletion
-
Damage caused by dropping a handle
-
Blocked, damaged or incorrectly installed cartridges
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service.
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and must only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every treatment.
HIFU treatment may not be appropriate for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Metallic implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active infections or inflammation
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Severe skin disorders
-
Conditions affecting normal healing
-
Recent surgery or injectable treatment in the area
-
Other contraindications identified in the operating manual
Energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The portable 7D HIFU system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Qualified independent practitioners
-
Appropriately equipped mobile aesthetic professionals
The machine is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine?
Dedicated Face and Body Handles
Separate handles help operators select the correct equipment for facial and deeper body applications.
Seven Cartridge Depths
A complete 1.5–13 mm cartridge range supports multiple face, neck and body treatment areas.
Specialized Eye-Area Option
The 2.0 mm, 5.5 MHz cartridge provides an additional precision option for appropriately selected areas around the eyes.
High Cartridge Capacity
Cartridges are rated for approximately 10,000–20,000 shots, depending on the cartridge and production configuration.
Portable Professional Design
The 17 kg desktop format can be repositioned more easily than a large floor-standing system.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the Face Handle and Body Handle?
The Face Handle uses 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for facial and neck applications. The Body Handle uses deeper 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges for professional body-contouring treatments.
What is special about the 2.0 mm cartridge?
The 2.0 mm cartridge operates at 5.5 MHz and is intended for precise treatment of suitable areas around the eyes. It must only be used by a trained operator with appropriate knowledge of facial anatomy.
How many shots does each cartridge provide?
The supplied specifications indicate approximately 10,000–20,000 shots per cartridge. Confirm the capacity of each cartridge before ordering.
Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, energy setting and individual sensitivity. Clients may experience warmth, tingling or temporary discomfort. Treatment should not be described as completely painless.
Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may resume normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur.
When can clients expect results?
Some clients may notice early changes, while tissue-remodeling responses can continue over the following weeks or months. Results and timelines cannot be guaranteed.
Is this machine suitable for mobile practitioners?
Its portable design may suit qualified mobile professionals. Safe transportation, stable installation, hygiene control, insurance and compliance with local regulations remain essential.
Does the machine work with international power supplies?
The system is specified for AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz. The correct regional plug and electrical configuration should be confirmed before ordering.
Is training included?
Remote setup and operating guidance are included. Operators must still meet all professional qualification and licensing requirements applicable in their market.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects in approved machine components. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and RoHS documentation?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Expand Your Services with Portable Face and Body HIFU
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine combines two dedicated handles and seven treatment depths within one compact professional platform.
Use it to develop treatment services for:
-
Facial lifting and firming
-
Precision eye-area treatments
-
Jawline and neck contouring
-
Professional body contouring
Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, the complete technical datasheet, cartridge information and purchasing guidance.
Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Receives in 8 days.
$1,999.00
Professional Cold Fusional Plasma System
Ten Interchangeable Probes for Customized Skin-Care Treatments
The Cold Fusional Plasma Machine is a portable professional skin-care platform developed for dermatology clinics, medical spas, anti-aging centers and advanced beauty studios.
The system combines adjustable cold plasma technology with 10 interchangeable probe heads for surface treatments, localized applications, broader coverage and customized scar-appearance and skin-rejuvenation protocols.
Two multifunctional handles, a digital touchscreen, foot-switch operation and dedicated accessory racks support organized and efficient professional treatments.
Cold plasma technology | Ten interchangeable probes | Two treatment handles | Three-year warranty
Ten Interchangeable Probes on One Professional Platform
Plasma Spray
The Plasma Spray Head provides broad, non-contact plasma application across suitable surface skin areas.
Common applications include:
-
General skin rejuvenation
-
Dull-looking skin
-
Surface skin conditioning
-
Complexion-care programs
-
Broad facial applications
-
Maintenance-oriented treatments
Square Tube Head
The Square Tube Head is designed for controlled treatment of broader skin areas.
Common applications include:
-
Cheeks
-
Forehead
-
Neck
-
Décolletage
-
Broad texture concerns
-
General skin-conditioning protocols
Flared Tube Head
The Flared Tube Head provides graduated plasma application across selected treatment zones.
Common applications include:
-
Medium-sized facial areas
-
Surface skin care
-
Customized intensity programs
-
General rejuvenation
-
Texture-refinement treatments
-
Professional maintenance care
Small Roller Needle
The Small Roller Needle supports professionally planned treatments for smaller areas and localized skin concerns.
Common applications include:
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Small scar areas
-
Localized texture concerns
-
Precision skin-renewal programs
-
Selected facial zones
-
Customized professional protocols
Large Roller Needle
The Large Roller Needle provides wider coverage for professionally selected scar and texture treatments.
Common applications include:
-
Larger scar areas
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Broader skin-renewal programs
-
Body scar appearance
-
Professionally assessed treatment zones
-
Customized advanced protocols
44P Pin Head
The 44P Pin Head provides multi-point contact for broader professional skin-care applications.
Common applications include:
-
General skin stimulation
-
Texture-refinement programs
-
Broad facial areas
-
Skin-conditioning treatments
-
Complexion-care programs
-
Customized rejuvenation
Ozone Plasma Head
The Ozone Plasma Head supports suitable professional cleansing and skin-conditioning protocols.
Common applications include:
-
Acne-prone skin care
-
Oily-skin programs
-
Clarifying treatments
-
Surface skin conditioning
-
Post-cleansing care
-
Customized professional services
Diamond-Shaped Head
The Diamond-Shaped Head is designed for controlled treatment of selected texture concerns and contoured areas.
Common applications include:
-
Uneven-looking skin texture
-
Surface skin refinement
-
Localized treatment zones
-
Contour-area applications
-
General rejuvenation
-
Professional smoothing protocols
Curved Needle Head
The Curved Needle Head supports precision treatment of contoured or difficult-to-reach areas.
Common applications include:
-
Curved facial zones
-
Localized scar appearance
-
Precision texture treatments
-
Small treatment areas
-
Contour-focused protocols
-
Detailed professional work
Straight Needle Head
The Straight Needle Head is designed for precise localized plasma application.
Common applications include:
-
Individual treatment points
-
Small scar areas
-
Localized skin imperfections
-
Precision professional protocols
-
Targeted texture concerns
-
Detailed skin-care applications
The appropriate probe, intensity, contact method and session duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, treatment area and professional protocol.
Select the Right Probe Combination for Each Client
The system supports customized treatment pathways using one or more of its 10 probes.
Program 1: General Skin Rejuvenation
A broad-treatment program for dull-looking skin and general complexion care.
Recommended probes:
-
Plasma Spray
-
Square Tube Head
-
Flared Tube Head
-
44P Pin Head
Recommended for:
-
Dull-looking skin
-
General facial rejuvenation
-
Complexion-care programs
-
Professional maintenance treatments
Program 2: Fine Lines and Wrinkles
A precision program for suitable facial lines and localized aging concerns.
Recommended probes:
-
Plasma Spray
-
Small Roller Needle
-
Curved Needle Head
-
Straight Needle Head
Recommended for:
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Forehead areas
-
Suitable eye-contour areas
-
Localized anti-aging programs
Program 3: Scar Appearance and Texture
A customized program for appropriately selected scars and uneven-looking texture.
Recommended probes:
-
Small Roller Needle
-
Large Roller Needle
-
Diamond-Shaped Head
-
Straight Needle Head
Recommended for:
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Suitable surgical scars
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Localized skin-renewal programs
Program 4: Acne-Prone and Oily Skin
A clarifying program for suitable acne-prone and oily skin.
Recommended probes:
-
Plasma Spray
-
Ozone Plasma Head
-
Square Tube Head
-
44P Pin Head
Recommended for:
-
Acne-prone skin
-
Oily-looking skin
-
Clarifying programs
-
Professional skin-conditioning services
Precision Probe Selection for Customized Treatments
Ten probes provide different coverage patterns for surface, localized and broader professional treatments.
| Probe Category | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Spray and Tube Probes | Surface skin care and broader treatment coverage |
| Roller Probes | Professionally selected scar and texture protocols |
| Multi-Pin Probe | Broad multi-point skin-conditioning treatments |
| Ozone Plasma Probe | Clarifying and acne-prone skin-care programs |
| Precision Needle Probes | Localized and contoured treatment areas |
| Diamond-Shaped Probe | Texture-refinement and customized applications |
The adjustable settings and interchangeable probes give trained operators greater control over treatment coverage and intensity.
New clients should begin with conservative settings before intensity or treatment coverage is increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The system supports professional treatment of multiple facial and body areas.
Facial Treatments
-
Forehead
-
Cheeks
-
Chin
-
Jawline
-
Suitable areas around the eyes
-
General facial skin
Neck and Upper-Body Treatments
-
Neck
-
Décolletage
-
Hands
-
Suitable upper-chest areas
-
Other professionally assessed zones
Scar and Texture Treatments
-
Acne-scar areas
-
Suitable surgical scars
-
Localized body scars
-
Uneven-looking skin texture
-
Other professionally assessed concerns
Professional Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected probe, intensity, treatment area and professional protocol.
| Skin Concern | Applicable Probe | Intended Skin-Care Application |
|---|---|---|
| Dull-looking skin | Plasma Spray | General rejuvenation |
| Fine-line appearance | Small Roller or Spray | Anti-aging support |
| Acne-scar appearance | Roller or Precision Probe | Scar-appearance programs |
| Suitable surgical scars | Large Roller or Precision Probe | Texture-refinement support |
| Acne-prone skin | Ozone Plasma Head | Clarifying skin care |
| Uneven-looking texture | Diamond-Shaped or 44P Head | Surface-refinement programs |
| Broader facial areas | Square or Flared Tube | General skin conditioning |
| Contoured areas | Curved Needle Head | Precision professional treatment |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s skin concerns, medical history, previous treatments, current products, healing response and contraindications.
2. Probe Selection and Preparation
The appropriate probe is selected and installed according to the operating manual. Reusable components are cleaned and disinfected, while single-use components are prepared according to infection-control requirements.
3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the plasma intensity, operating method and session duration according to the treatment area, probe and client tolerance.
4. Cold Plasma Treatment
The selected probe is applied using the appropriate professional technique. A typical treatment takes approximately 5–10 minutes per area.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and appropriate moisturizer, sunscreen or other aftercare products are recommended.
Temporary redness, warmth, dryness, sensitivity or other short-term responses may occur depending on the probe and treatment intensity.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines 10 interchangeable probes with two handles and digital controls for streamlined professional operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Cold fusional plasma technology
-
Ten interchangeable probes
-
Two multifunctional treatment handles
-
Digital touchscreen control
-
Adjustable treatment intensity
-
Foot-switch operation
-
Two accessory racks
-
Portable and compact design
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Cold Fusional Plasma Machine |
| Product Type | Portable professional cold plasma system |
| Technology | Cold fusional plasma |
| Probe Heads | 10 interchangeable probes |
| Main Handles | Two multifunctional handles |
| Treatment Duration | Approximately 5–10 minutes per area |
| Treatment Areas | Face, neck, décolletage, hands and suitable body scars |
| Primary Applications | Scar appearance, fine lines, texture, acne-prone skin and rejuvenation |
| Intensity | Adjustable professional settings |
| Control Interface | Digital touchscreen |
| Power Supply | USB or AC power configuration |
| Included Accessories | Two accessory racks and foot switch |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring and overload protection |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and technical assistance |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main cold plasma system, two treatment handles, 10 probes and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One Cold Fusional Plasma Machine
-
Two multifunctional plasma handles
-
Plasma Spray Head
-
Square Tube Head
-
Flared Tube Head
-
Small Roller Needle
-
Large Roller Needle
-
44P Pin Head
-
Ozone Plasma Head
-
Diamond-Shaped Head
-
Curved Needle Head
-
Straight Needle Head
-
Two accessory racks
-
Foot switch
-
Power cable
-
USB power components where applicable
-
English user manual
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Handle and probe installation
-
Probe-selection guidance
-
Intensity-adjustment instructions
-
Professional treatment protocols
-
Safety and contraindication guidance
-
Cleaning and infection-control instructions
-
Routine maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Handle installation
-
Operation of all 10 probes
-
Probe selection
-
Treatment-area planning
-
Intensity adjustment
-
Client consultation
-
Scar and texture protocols
-
Acne-prone skin programs
-
Cleaning and infection control
-
Routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The Cold Fusional Plasma Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Digital touchscreen
-
Plasma-generation components
-
Original treatment handles
-
Foot-switch components
-
Handle and accessory connections
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect probe installation or operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of probes, needles and consumables
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional plasma equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active cancer
-
Active herpes simplex
-
Open wounds or active skin infections
-
Severe inflammatory skin conditions
-
Recent surgery
-
Recent laser treatments, chemical peels or aggressive exfoliation
-
Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication
-
Bleeding disorders
-
Poor wound healing
-
A history of abnormal or keloid scarring
-
Reduced skin sensation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Needle and roller probes require appropriate hygiene, disinfection and infection-control procedures. Single-use components must not be reused.
Possible treatment responses may include redness, warmth, dryness, temporary irritation, swelling or sensitivity.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Dermatology clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Advanced skin-care studios
-
Anti-aging specialists
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Trained plasma practitioners
-
Qualified healthcare professionals
-
Professional beauty centers
-
Businesses expanding their advanced skin services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the Cold Fusional Plasma Machine?
Access Ten Professional Probes
The system includes 10 interchangeable probes for surface, broad-area, localized, scar-appearance and texture-refinement treatments.
Customize Every Treatment
Different probe shapes and adjustable intensity settings allow practitioners to create area-specific professional protocols.
Treat Multiple Skin Concerns
The system supports professional programs for fine lines, acne-scar appearance, suitable surgical scars, dull-looking skin and uneven texture.
Improve Professional Workflow
Two handles, foot-switch operation, a digital touchscreen and two accessory racks support organized and efficient treatments.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is cold fusional plasma?
Cold fusional plasma is an ionized-gas technology used in professional skin-care treatments. The system delivers controlled plasma energy through different treatment probes.
What probes are included?
The system includes a Plasma Spray, Square Tube, Flared Tube, Small Roller Needle, Large Roller Needle, 44P Pin Head, Ozone Plasma Head, Diamond-Shaped Head, Curved Needle Head and Straight Needle Head.
Which probe is suitable for acne-scar appearance?
Roller or precision probes may be incorporated into professionally planned acne-scar protocols. Probe selection depends on scar type, skin condition and practitioner assessment.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical treatment takes approximately 5–10 minutes per area. A session covering multiple areas may require additional time.
Can the system be used for fine lines?
Yes. Plasma Spray, Square Tube and Small Roller probes may be incorporated into professional programs for suitable fine-line concerns.
Is the treatment painless?
Client sensation varies according to the probe and intensity. Tingling, warmth, prickling or discomfort may occur.
Is there downtime?
Recovery depends on the selected probe and treatment intensity. Temporary redness, warmth, dryness, sensitivity or swelling may occur.
Can the machine be used on every skin type?
Every client requires professional assessment. Skin type, pigmentation risk, sensitivity, healing history and treatment area must be considered before treatment.
Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, all 10 probes, intensity selection, treatment protocols, infection control, maintenance and safety. A training certificate is provided.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Advanced Cold Plasma Treatments to Your Business
The Cold Fusional Plasma Machine combines:
-
Professional cold plasma technology
-
Ten interchangeable treatment probes
-
Two multifunctional handles
-
Portable touchscreen and foot-switch operation
-
Three-year parts warranty and professional support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its probe options, package contents and professional training.
Order Your Cold Fusional Plasma Machine and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$1,399.00
Professional Pressotherapy and Lymphatic Massage System
Sequential Air Compression for Professional Wellness and Recovery Treatments
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device is a professional air-compression therapy system developed for beauty salons, wellness centers, physiotherapy clinics, medical spas and body-contouring studios.
Its digital touchscreen provides adjustable pressure, intensity, treatment duration and program selection. Multiple overlapping air chambers inflate and deflate sequentially to create a rhythmic compression massage across the selected treatment areas.
The system can be used as a standalone wellness service or combined with suitable body-contouring and recovery programs.
Sequential air compression | Full-body garment | Adjustable treatment programs | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Applications on One Pressotherapy Platform
Lymphatic Drainage
The sequential compression system supports natural lymphatic movement by applying controlled pressure through multiple overlapping air chambers.
Common treatment applications include:
-
Lymphatic drainage programs
-
Fluid-movement support
-
Leg-heaviness treatments
-
General wellness sessions
-
Post-treatment drainage support
-
Maintenance-oriented wellness programs
Water-Retention Support
The pressotherapy garment applies rhythmic compression to the selected body areas, supporting professional programs for clients concerned about temporary water retention or feelings of heaviness.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Legs
-
Thighs
-
Waist
-
Abdomen
-
Arms
-
Full body
Circulation and Recovery
Sequential compression may support circulation and recovery-oriented wellness programs.
Common applications include:
-
Post-workout recovery
-
Tired-leg treatments
-
Muscle-relaxation programs
-
General circulation support
-
Wellness and recovery sessions
-
Suitable post-procedure support programs
Relaxation and Wellness
The rhythmic inflation and deflation of the garment creates a comfortable compression-massage experience.
Common applications include:
-
Relaxation treatments
-
Spa wellness programs
-
Body-care packages
-
Stress-reduction services
-
Maintenance treatments
-
Membership-based wellness programs
The appropriate pressure, intensity, duration and program should be selected according to the client’s condition, comfort level and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Program for Your Clients
The system supports adjustable programs for different treatment objectives. The appropriate program should be selected following consultation and client assessment.
Program 1: Lymphatic Drainage
A structured sequential-compression program designed to support natural lymphatic movement.
Recommended applications:
-
General lymphatic-drainage sessions
-
Fluid-movement support
-
Tired or heavy legs
-
Wellness maintenance
Recommended for:
-
Wellness centers
-
Beauty salons
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Businesses adding lymphatic-massage services
Program 2: Water-Retention Support
A customizable compression program for clients concerned about temporary water retention and feelings of heaviness.
Recommended applications:
-
Leg and thigh treatments
-
Waist and abdomen programs
-
Full-body compression sessions
-
General body-wellness services
Recommended for:
-
Spa treatment packages
-
Body-care programs
-
Wellness memberships
-
Clients seeking a lighter, refreshed feeling
Program 3: Recovery and Circulation
A rhythmic compression program designed to support circulation and recovery-focused services.
Recommended applications:
-
Post-workout recovery
-
Tired-leg programs
-
Muscle-relaxation sessions
-
Suitable professional recovery protocols
Recommended for:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Fitness and recovery centers
-
Sports-wellness businesses
-
Medical spas offering recovery services
Program 4: Body-Contouring Add-On
A complementary program for suitable clients receiving body-contouring treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Cryolipolysis treatment courses
-
Cavitation programs
-
Radiofrequency body treatments
-
Other suitable contouring services
Recommended for:
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Aesthetic centers
-
Medical spas
-
Businesses creating combination treatment packages
Adjustable Compression for Customized Treatments
The Pressotherapy Machine provides adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection. Each setting should be selected according to the treatment area, client comfort and professional objective.
| Treatment Program | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Gentle Compression | Relaxation, first-time clients and comfort-focused treatments |
| Standard Compression | General lymphatic-drainage and wellness programs |
| Targeted Compression | Selected legs, arms, waist or abdomen treatments |
| Full-Body Program | Comprehensive wellness and compression-massage sessions |
The adjustable settings give trained operators greater control over treatment intensity and client comfort.
The correct program must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment areas.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The supplied full-body garment supports targeted and comprehensive compression programs.
Leg Treatments
-
Thighs
-
Lower legs
-
Tired-leg programs
-
Leg-heaviness treatments
-
Recovery-oriented sessions
Arm Treatments
-
Upper arms
-
Lower arms
-
General circulation support
-
Relaxation programs
-
Suitable recovery treatments
Waist and Abdomen Treatments
-
Waist
-
Abdomen
-
General body-wellness programs
-
Water-retention support
-
Body-contouring add-on services
Professional Wellness and Recovery Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected pressure, intensity, duration and compression program.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Program | Intended Wellness Application |
|---|---|---|
| Legs and thighs | Sequential compression | Lymphatic-drainage and tired-leg support |
| Arms | Targeted compression | General circulation and recovery support |
| Waist and abdomen | Targeted compression | Body wellness and water-retention support |
| Full body | Full-body compression | Comprehensive relaxation and wellness |
| Lower body | Recovery program | Post-workout and muscle-recovery support |
| Body-contouring areas | Add-on program | Complementary treatment-course support |
| Tired or heavy legs | Gentle or standard compression | Comfort and relaxation |
| General wellness | Customized program | Maintenance-oriented compression massage |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, treatment goals and suitability. Target areas, pressure level, treatment duration and program are then selected.
2. Garment Preparation
The client is positioned comfortably, and the appropriate garment sections are fitted over the selected treatment areas. The operator confirms that all air-hose connections are secure.
3. Parameter Selection
Pressure, intensity, duration and treatment program are selected according to the client’s comfort, treatment area and professional protocol.
4. Treatment Application
The machine sequentially inflates and deflates the overlapping air chambers, producing rhythmic waves of compression across the selected areas. A typical session lasts approximately 20–45 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the session, the garment is removed and the client receives appropriate wellness and aftercare guidance.
Some clients may return to normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary pressure marks, mild tenderness, increased urination or other short-term responses may occur.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines digital touchscreen control with adjustable air-compression programs for streamlined use in professional settings.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Digital touchscreen control
-
Multiple overlapping air chambers
-
Sequential compression technology
-
Adjustable pressure and intensity
-
Customizable treatment duration
-
Preset wellness programs
-
Full-body treatment garment
-
Face-to-face and add-on service flexibility
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device |
| Product Type | Professional air-compression therapy system |
| Technology | Sequential air-pressure compression |
| Functions | Lymphatic drainage, wellness, recovery and body-care support |
| Treatment Areas | Legs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body |
| Compression System | Multiple overlapping air chambers |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–45 minutes |
| Recommended Protocol | Commonly 6–12 sessions, depending on client assessment |
| Customization | Adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection |
| Treatment Application | Fully clothed, non-invasive compression massage |
| Safety Features | Pressure-limit controls, automatic shut-off and protective sensors |
| Control Interface | Digital touchscreen with preset wellness programs |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Package Contents | Machine, full-body garment, power cable and manual |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, full-body compression garment and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One Pressotherapy control system
-
Full-body compression garment
-
Leg garment sections
-
Arm garment sections
-
Waist and abdomen garment sections
-
Multiple overlapping air chambers
-
Air-hose connection components
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Garment-fitting instructions
-
Air-hose connection guidance
-
Pressure and intensity selection
-
Treatment-program guidance
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Garment fitting
-
Air-hose connections
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Pressure and intensity adjustment
-
Treatment-duration selection
-
Program selection
-
Client positioning
-
Basic treatment protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Air compressor and internal pressure components
-
Original connection hoses
-
Garment connection components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect pressure or program selection
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of garments, hoses and consumable items
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional wellness equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Active deep-vein thrombosis or suspected blood clots
-
Severe peripheral vascular disease
-
Uncontrolled cardiovascular conditions
-
Severe heart failure
-
Acute infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Severe skin conditions
-
Unexplained swelling
-
Severe kidney disease
-
Severe liver disease
-
Untreated hypertension
-
Impaired sensation
-
Recent surgery without appropriate clearance
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
The compression garment must be fitted correctly, and the selected pressure must remain comfortable throughout treatment.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Wellness centers
-
Medical spas
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Fitness and recovery centers
-
Professional massage providers
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their wellness services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose This Pressotherapy System?
Offer a Comfortable Wellness Service
Sequential air compression provides a rhythmic and relaxing treatment experience that can be added to professional wellness menus.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
The supplied garment supports treatments for the legs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives.
Expand Your Service Menu
The system can support standalone lymphatic-massage services, recovery programs, wellness packages and suitable body-contouring add-ons.
Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is pressotherapy?
Pressotherapy is a compression-massage treatment that uses multiple air chambers to apply rhythmic pressure to selected body areas. The chambers inflate and deflate sequentially to support lymphatic movement, circulation and relaxation.
How does sequential air compression work?
The garment contains overlapping air chambers that inflate and deflate in a controlled sequence. This creates a wave-like compression massage across the selected treatment areas.
Which areas can be treated?
The supplied garment supports professional treatments for the legs, thighs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 20–45 minutes. Treatment time can be adjusted according to the selected program, treatment area and client comfort.
How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional program may include 6–12 sessions. The final number and frequency should be selected according to the client’s condition, objectives and response.
Is pressotherapy uncomfortable?
The treatment is designed to provide rhythmic compression. Pressure and intensity can be adjusted according to client comfort. The treatment should not cause pain.
Can pressotherapy be combined with other treatments?
It may be offered as a complementary service alongside suitable cryolipolysis, cavitation, radiofrequency and other body-contouring programs following professional assessment.
Is there downtime?
Most suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Individual responses may vary.
Is training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Normal garment wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Professional Pressotherapy to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device combines:
-
Sequential air-compression technology
-
Adjustable pressure and treatment programs
-
Full-body garment coverage
-
Professional wellness and recovery applications
-
Three-year parts warranty and lifetime support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment programs, package contents and professional training.
Order Your Pressotherapy Machine and Request a Quote
Receives in 8 days.
$2,299.00
Professional Radial Pressure-Wave and Ultrasound System
Two Physiotherapy Modalities in One Compact Platform
The Wikbeauty Ultrashock combines pneumatic radial pressure-wave technology with 1 MHz therapeutic ultrasound in one professional physiotherapy system.
Twelve interchangeable pressure-wave applicator heads, touchscreen controls and separate treatment modes provide qualified practitioners with flexibility for professionally assessed musculoskeletal and rehabilitation applications.
The compact system integrates two established modalities without requiring two separate control units.
Two modalities | 12 applicator heads | Touchscreen control | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Treatment Modalities
Pneumatic Radial Pressure-Wave Therapy
The pneumatic handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate a projectile inside the handpiece. The projectile strikes the selected applicator, producing acoustic pressure waves that spread radially into the treatment area.
Key features include:
-
Adjustable pressure up to 6 bar
-
Twelve interchangeable applicator heads
-
Applicator sizes from D6 to D25
-
Flat, targeted-contact and radial applicator designs
-
Touchscreen body-area menus
-
Professional handpiece construction
Therapeutic Ultrasound
The ultrasound handpiece operates at 1 MHz and delivers mechanical vibration through an appropriate coupling gel.
Therapeutic ultrasound can be used in continuous or pulsed formats where supported by the machine configuration and professional protocol.
Potential professional applications may include:
-
Selected soft-tissue rehabilitation
-
Tissue-heating protocols
-
Preparation for stretching or mobility work
-
Other professionally assessed musculoskeletal applications
Treatment outcomes depend on intensity, duration, duty cycle, treatment area and individual response.
Radial Pressure Waves Versus Focused Shockwaves
Ultrashock uses pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology.
| Radial pressure waves | Focused shockwaves |
|---|---|
| Generated by a projectile striking an applicator | Generated through electrohydraulic, electromagnetic or piezoelectric mechanisms |
| Highest pressure is generally near the applicator surface | Energy is concentrated at a defined focal point |
| Pressure spreads radially from the applicator | Energy is focused at a selected depth |
| Commonly described using bar and Hz | Commonly described using energy-flux density |
| Often used for professionally assessed soft-tissue applications | Used for selected focused clinical applications |
An applicator described as a “focus head” provides more localized contact, but it does not turn the pneumatic radial system into a true focused shockwave generator.
Twelve Interchangeable Applicator Heads
The system includes twelve pressure-wave applicator heads ranging from D6 to D25.
Flat Applicators
Designed to distribute pressure over a relatively broad contact area.
Common professional uses may include:
-
Larger muscle groups
-
Broader soft-tissue areas
-
Surface-oriented protocols
Targeted-Contact Applicators
Designed to provide more localized contact over an appropriately selected treatment area.
These heads do not create a true focused shockwave field.
Radial Applicators
Designed to distribute pressure across wider anatomical areas according to the supplied operating protocol.
D6–D25 Size Range
Smaller applicators may suit localized areas, while larger applicators provide broader contact.
Applicator selection must be based on anatomy, diagnosis, patient tolerance and professional training.
Potential Professional Applications
Subject to the device’s authorized indications, local regulations and clinical assessment, the Ultrashock may be incorporated into rehabilitation programs concerning:
-
Plantar-fascia pain
-
Achilles-tendon concerns
-
Patellar-tendon concerns
-
Lateral or medial elbow tendinopathy
-
Selected shoulder-tendon conditions
-
Myofascial trigger points
-
Muscle tension
-
Selected sports-related soft-tissue conditions
-
Professionally assessed rehabilitation programs
Evidence and protocols vary between conditions. The system should not be represented as treating virtually every pain, joint, tendon or sports injury.
Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The Ultrashock should not be promoted as guaranteeing:
-
Calcium-deposit removal
-
New blood-vessel formation
-
Tissue regeneration
-
Accelerated healing
-
Elimination of inflammation
-
Permanent pain relief
-
Faster return to sport
-
Prevention of future injuries
-
Superior outcomes from combining both modalities
-
Suitability for every musculoskeletal condition
Clinical outcomes depend on diagnosis, treatment parameters, patient condition and the broader rehabilitation plan.
Flexible Dual-Modality Workflow
Radial Pressure-Wave Treatment
The practitioner selects an applicator and adjusts the available pressure, frequency and impact settings according to the treatment plan.
Therapeutic-Ultrasound Treatment
The 1 MHz ultrasound handpiece is used with an appropriate coupling gel and professionally selected treatment parameters.
Sequential Treatment Planning
A qualified practitioner may use both modalities within the same rehabilitation plan when clinically appropriate.
The modalities should not automatically be combined on the same area or represented as producing superior results without supporting evidence.
Independent Use
Either modality can be used independently according to the patient assessment and treatment objective.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s diagnosis, medical history, symptoms, treatment area and contraindications.
2. Modality Selection
Radial pressure-wave therapy, therapeutic ultrasound or a professionally justified sequence is selected.
3. Applicator Preparation
The appropriate pressure-wave head or ultrasound handpiece is inspected and installed.
4. Treatment-Area Preparation
The patient is positioned correctly, and the recommended coupling gel is applied.
5. Parameter Selection
Pressure, frequency, impact count, ultrasound intensity and treatment time are selected according to the professional protocol.
6. Controlled Treatment
The modality is applied while the practitioner monitors comfort, tissue response and device operation.
7. Documentation and Follow-Up
Treatment settings and patient response are documented. Further sessions are scheduled only when clinically appropriate.
Temporary discomfort, redness, bruising, swelling or tenderness may occur after pressure-wave treatment. Therapeutic ultrasound risks depend on intensity, duration and treatment location.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | Ultrashock |
| Product type | Professional dual-modality physiotherapy system |
| Included modalities | Pneumatic radial pressure waves and therapeutic ultrasound |
| Pressure-wave mechanism | Pneumatic ballistic |
| Maximum pressure | Up to 6 bar |
| Applicator heads | Twelve interchangeable heads |
| Applicator sizes | D6–D25 |
| Applicator styles | Flat, targeted-contact and radial |
| Ultrasound frequency | 1 MHz |
| Control interface | Touchscreen with body-area modes |
| Rated power | 250 W |
| Voltage options | 110 V or 220 V |
| Package dimensions | 58 × 46 × 42 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 28 kg |
| Certifications | CE certified with applicable ISO documentation |
| Warranty | Three-year limited parts warranty |
| Support | Remote after-sales support |
The package dimensions should not be described as the machine’s installed footprint unless the product dimensions are confirmed separately.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One Ultrashock control system
-
One pneumatic radial pressure-wave handpiece
-
One 1 MHz therapeutic-ultrasound handpiece
-
Twelve interchangeable pressure-wave applicators
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
-
Required connection accessories
-
Starter coupling gel, where applicable
Documentation and Certification
-
English user manual
-
CE certificate
-
Applicable ISO documentation
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
Radial pressure-wave operating guidance
-
Therapeutic-ultrasound operating guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Contraindication-screening guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Professional Training
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Pressure-wave handpiece setup
-
Applicator selection
-
Basic parameter adjustment
-
Therapeutic-ultrasound operation
-
Coupling-gel use
-
Treatment monitoring
-
Equipment maintenance
-
Training certificate after completion
Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
CE-Certified Professional System
The Wikbeauty Ultrashock comes with:
-
CE Certificate
-
Applicable ISO Documentation
These documents are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution.
The device must be marketed and used only for the indications covered by its applicable certification and local regulatory status.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering:
-
System installation
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Pressure-wave handpiece setup
-
Applicator-head installation
-
Basic pressure and impact adjustment
-
Therapeutic-ultrasound operation
-
Patient screening
-
Cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
A training certificate is provided after completion.
Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Ultrashock is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and remote after-sales assistance.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main control system
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen
-
Original pneumatic handpiece
-
Original ultrasound handpiece
-
Internal compressor components
-
Original connectors
-
Other eligible machine parts
Applicators, projectiles, seals, filters and other wear components may have separate warranty terms.
Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping a handpiece
-
Normal applicator or projectile wear
-
Filter and seal replacement
-
Liquid entering a handpiece
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Maintenance and Operating Care
Use the Correct Coupling Medium
Apply the recommended gel during radial pressure-wave and ultrasound treatments.
Prevent gel or other liquids from entering the handpieces, connectors or ventilation openings.
Inspect Wear Components
Regularly inspect:
-
Applicator heads
-
Projectile and guide components
-
Seals
-
Filters
-
Handpiece connections
-
Ultrasound treatment surface
Clean After Use
Clean and disinfect external treatment surfaces according to the supplied instructions. Do not immerse electrical handpieces.
Store Correctly
Keep the system in a dry, climate-controlled environment and protect all handpieces from impact.
Contraindications and Safety Precautions
The Ultrashock is professional therapeutic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
Treatment may be contraindicated or require additional assessment when the treatment field includes:
-
Active infection
-
Open wounds
-
Malignant tumor
-
A fetus
-
Significant bleeding or coagulation disorder
-
Thrombosis
-
Pacemaker or implanted electronic device
-
Severely impaired sensation
-
Lung tissue or other air-containing organs
-
Brain or spinal structures
-
Active growth plates
-
Other contraindications listed in the user manual
High energy should not be applied directly over vulnerable organs, large blood vessels, major nerves or other prohibited areas.
This is not an exhaustive list. Appropriate examination, diagnosis and medical clearance are required when treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The Ultrashock is suitable for:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Rehabilitation centers
-
Sports-medicine practices
-
Orthopedic rehabilitation facilities
-
Licensed multidisciplinary clinics
-
Qualified physical therapists
-
Appropriately trained healthcare professionals
The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose Ultrashock?
Two Modalities in One Platform
Combine radial pressure-wave treatment and 1 MHz therapeutic ultrasound without purchasing two separate control units.
Twelve Applicator Heads
Choose from D6–D25 applicator sizes for different professionally assessed areas.
Adjustable Pressure
The pneumatic handpiece provides output up to 6 bar.
Touchscreen Operation
Body-area menus help streamline equipment setup while leaving final parameter selection to the practitioner.
International Voltage Options
Select either a 110 V or 220 V configuration for the intended market.
Professional Certifications
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training and a three-year limited parts warranty are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
Is Ultrashock a focused shockwave machine?
No. Ultrashock uses pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology.
Does the targeted-contact applicator create focused shockwaves?
No. It provides more localized surface contact but does not create the focal field of a true focused shockwave generator.
What is the second treatment modality?
The system includes a 1 MHz therapeutic-ultrasound handpiece.
Can both modalities be used during one session?
A qualified practitioner may use both modalities when clinically appropriate. They should not automatically be combined for every patient or condition.
Can Ultrashock break down calcifications?
Some shockwave technologies are used in selected calcific conditions, but results depend on the technology, diagnosis and protocol. Guaranteed calcification removal should not be claimed for this radial device.
Does the machine treat every sports injury?
No. Proper diagnosis and patient selection are required. Different injuries require different rehabilitation approaches.
Is treatment painless?
Pressure-wave treatment may produce discomfort, tenderness or temporary bruising. Settings should be adjusted according to clinical needs and patient tolerance.
Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This does not replace professional physiotherapy qualifications.
Is Ultrashock CE approved?
The supplied information confirms CE certification and applicable ISO documentation.
What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Wear components, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
What certifications are included?
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation.
Add Dual-Modality Physiotherapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty Ultrashock combines:
-
Pneumatic radial pressure-wave technology
-
One-megahertz therapeutic ultrasound
-
Twelve interchangeable applicator heads
-
Touchscreen body-area controls
-
A compact professional platform
Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations.
Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Receives in 8 days.
Elevate Your Practice
Shop by Treatment
Explore professional-grade machines crafted for every aesthetic and wellness need.
Top Sellers You Can't Miss
$999.00
Receives in 8 days.
$1,199.00
Receives in 8 days.
$1,129.00
Receives in 8 days.
$3,999.00
Receives in 8 days.
$1,299.00
Receives in 8 days.
Wait — here's $50 off your order
Looks like you left something behind. Complete your order now and take $50 off with code COMEBACK50 — no minimum purchase required.
- Choosing a selection results in a full page refresh.
- Opens in a new window.